1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2003-05-21
2 Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005
3 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 See the end for copying conditions.
6 Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
7 For older news, see the file ONEWS
8 You can narrow news to the specific version by calling
9 `view-emacs-news' with a prefix argument or by typing C-u C-h C-n.
12 +++ indicates that the appropriate manual has already been updated.
13 --- means no change in the manuals is called for.
14 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
15 so we will look at it and add it to the manual.
18 * Installation Changes in Emacs 22.1
21 ** Emacs now supports new configure options `--program-prefix',
22 `--program-suffix' and `--program-transform-name' that affect the names of
26 ** Emacs can now be built without sound support.
29 ** You can build Emacs with Gtk+ widgets by specifying `--with-x-toolkit=gtk'
30 when you run configure. This requires Gtk+ 2.0 or newer. This port
31 provides a way to display multilingual text in menus (with some caveats).
34 ** The `emacsserver' program has been removed, replaced with Lisp code.
37 ** By default, Emacs now uses a setgid helper program to update game
38 scores. The directory ${localstatedir}/games/emacs is the normal
39 place for game scores to be stored. You can control this with the
40 configure option `--with-game-dir'. The specific user that Emacs uses
41 to own the game scores is controlled by `--with-game-user'. If access
42 to a game user is not available, then scores will be stored separately
43 in each user's home directory.
46 ** Leim is now part of the Emacs distribution.
47 You no longer need to download a separate tarball in order to build
51 ** The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual is now part of the distribution.
53 The Emacs Lisp Reference Manual in Info format is built as part of the
54 Emacs build procedure and installed together with the Emacs User
55 Manual. A menu item was added to the menu bar that makes it easy
56 accessible (Help->More Manuals->Emacs Lisp Reference).
59 ** The Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp manual is now part of
62 This manual is now part of the standard distribution and is installed,
63 together with the Emacs User Manual, into the Info directory. A menu
64 item was added to the menu bar that makes it easy accessible
65 (Help->More Manuals->Introduction to Emacs Lisp).
68 ** New translations of the Emacs Tutorial are available in the
69 following languages: Brasilian Portuguese, Bulgarian, Chinese (both
70 with simplified and traditional characters), French, and Italian.
71 Type `C-u C-h t' to choose one of them in case your language setup
72 doesn't automatically select the right one.
75 ** A French translation of the `Emacs Survival Guide' is available.
78 ** Emacs now includes support for loading image libraries on demand.
79 (Currently this feature is only used on MS Windows.) You can configure
80 the supported image types and their associated dynamic libraries by
81 setting the variable `image-library-alist'.
84 ** Support for Cygwin was added.
87 ** Support for FreeBSD/Alpha has been added.
90 ** Support for GNU/Linux systems on S390 machines was added.
93 ** Support for MacOS X was added.
94 See the files mac/README and mac/INSTALL for build instructions.
97 ** Support for GNU/Linux systems on X86-64 machines was added.
100 ** Mac OS 9 port now uses the Carbon API by default. You can also
101 create non-Carbon build by specifying `NonCarbon' as a target. See
102 the files mac/README and mac/INSTALL for build instructions.
105 ** Building with -DENABLE_CHECKING does not automatically build with union
106 types any more. Add -DUSE_LISP_UNION_TYPE if you want union types.
109 ** When pure storage overflows while dumping, Emacs now prints how
110 much pure storage it will approximately need.
112 ** The script etc/emacs-buffer.gdb can be used with gdb to retrieve the
113 contents of buffers from a core dump and save them to files easily, should
117 * Startup Changes in Emacs 22.1
120 ** New command line option -Q or --quick.
121 This is like using -q --no-site-file, but in addition it also disables
122 the fancy startup screen.
125 ** New command line option -D or --basic-display.
126 Disables the menu-bar, the tool-bar, the scroll-bars, tool tips, and
130 ** New command line option -nbc or --no-blinking-cursor disables
131 the blinking cursor on graphical terminals.
134 ** The option --script FILE runs Emacs in batch mode and loads FILE.
135 It is useful for writing Emacs Lisp shell script files, because they
136 can start with this line:
138 #!/usr/bin/emacs --script
141 ** The option --directory DIR now modifies `load-path' immediately.
142 Directories are added to the front of `load-path' in the order they
143 appear on the command line. For example, with this command line:
145 emacs -batch -L .. -L /tmp --eval "(require 'foo)"
147 Emacs looks for library `foo' in the parent directory, then in /tmp, then
148 in the other directories in `load-path'. (-L is short for --directory.)
151 ** The command line option --no-windows has been changed to
152 --no-window-system. The old one still works, but is deprecated.
155 ** The -f option, used from the command line to call a function,
156 now reads arguments for the function interactively if it is
157 an interactively callable function.
160 ** When you specify a frame size with --geometry, the size applies to
161 all frames you create. A position specified with --geometry only
162 affects the initial frame.
165 ** Emacs can now be invoked in full-screen mode on a windowed display.
166 When Emacs is invoked on a window system, the new command-line options
167 `--fullwidth', `--fullheight', and `--fullscreen' produce a frame
168 whose width, height, or both width and height take up the entire
169 screen size. (For now, this does not work with some window managers.)
172 ** Emacs now displays a splash screen by default even if command-line
173 arguments were given. The new command-line option --no-splash
174 disables the splash screen; see also the variable
175 `inhibit-startup-message' (which is also aliased as
176 `inhibit-splash-screen').
179 ** New user option `inhibit-startup-buffer-menu'.
180 When loading many files, for instance with `emacs *', Emacs normally
181 displays a buffer menu. This option turns the buffer menu off.
185 You can now put the init files .emacs and .emacs_SHELL under
186 ~/.emacs.d or directly under ~. Emacs will find them in either place.
189 ** Emacs now reads the standard abbrevs file ~/.abbrev_defs
190 automatically at startup, if it exists. When Emacs offers to save
191 modified buffers, it saves the abbrevs too if they have changed. It
192 can do this either silently or asking for confirmation first,
193 according to the value of `save-abbrevs'.
195 * Incompatible Editing Changes in Emacs 22.1
198 ** M-g is now a prefix key.
199 M-g g and M-g M-g run goto-line.
200 M-g n and M-g M-n run next-error (like C-x `).
201 M-g p and M-g M-p run previous-error.
204 ** C-u M-g M-g switches to the most recent previous buffer,
205 and goes to the specified line in that buffer.
207 When goto-line starts to execute, if there's a number in the buffer at
208 point then it acts as the default argument for the minibuffer.
211 ** The old bindings C-M-delete and C-M-backspace have been deleted,
212 since there are situations where one or the other will shut down
213 the operating system or your X server.
216 ** line-move-ignore-invisible now defaults to t.
219 ** When the undo information of the current command gets really large
220 (beyond the value of `undo-outer-limit'), Emacs discards it and warns
224 ** `apply-macro-to-region-lines' now operates on all lines that begin
225 in the region, rather than on all complete lines in the region.
228 ** A prefix argument is no longer required to repeat a jump to a
229 previous mark, i.e. C-u C-SPC C-SPC C-SPC ... cycles through the
230 mark ring. Use C-u C-u C-SPC to set the mark immediately after a jump.
233 ** The info-search bindings on C-h C-f, C-h C-k and C-h C-i
234 have been moved to C-h F, C-h K and C-h S.
237 ** In incremental search, C-w is changed. M-%, C-M-w and C-M-y are special.
239 See below under "incremental search changes".
242 ** C-x C-f RET, typing nothing in the minibuffer, is no longer a special case.
244 Since the default input is the current directory, this has the effect
245 of specifying the current directory. Normally that means to visit the
246 directory with Dired.
249 ** The completion commands TAB, SPC and ? in the minibuffer apply only
250 to the text before point. If there is text in the buffer after point,
251 it remains unchanged.
254 ** M-o now is the prefix key for setting text properties;
255 M-o M-o requests refontification.
258 ** You can now follow links by clicking Mouse-1 on the link.
260 See below for more details.
263 ** In Dired's ! command (dired-do-shell-command), `*' and `?' now
264 control substitution of the file names only when they are surrounded
265 by whitespace. This means you can now use them as shell wildcards
266 too. If you want to use just plain `*' as a wildcard, type `*""'; the
267 doublequotes make no difference in the shell, but they prevent
268 special treatment in `dired-do-shell-command'.
270 * Editing Changes in Emacs 22.1
273 ** The max size of buffers and integers has been doubled.
274 On 32bit machines, it is now 256M (i.e. 268435455).
277 ** M-g is now a prefix key.
278 M-g g and M-g M-g run goto-line.
279 M-g n and M-g M-n run next-error (like C-x `).
280 M-g p and M-g M-p run previous-error.
283 ** C-u M-g M-g switches to the most recent previous buffer,
284 and goes to the specified line in that buffer.
286 When goto-line starts to execute, if there's a number in the buffer at
287 point then it acts as the default argument for the minibuffer.
290 ** The old bindings C-M-delete and C-M-backspace have been deleted,
291 since there are situations where one or the other will shut down
292 the operating system or your X server.
295 ** line-move-ignore-invisible now defaults to t.
298 ** When the undo information of the current command gets really large
299 (beyond the value of `undo-outer-limit'), Emacs discards it and warns
303 ** `apply-macro-to-region-lines' now operates on all lines that begin
304 in the region, rather than on all complete lines in the region.
307 ** You can now switch buffers in a cyclic order with C-x C-left and
308 (prev-buffer) and C-x C-right (next-buffer). C-x left and C-x right
312 ** `undo-only' does an undo which does not redo any previous undo.
315 ** M-SPC (just-one-space) when given a numeric argument N
316 converts whitespace around point to N spaces.
319 ** New commands to operate on pairs of open and close characters:
320 `insert-pair', `delete-pair', `raise-sexp'.
323 ** New command `kill-whole-line' kills an entire line at once.
324 By default, it is bound to C-S-<backspace>.
327 ** Yanking text now discards certain text properties that can
328 be inconvenient when you did not expect them. The variable
329 `yank-excluded-properties' specifies which ones. Insertion
330 of register contents and rectangles also discards these properties.
333 ** The default values of paragraph-start and indent-line-function have
334 been changed to reflect those used in Text mode rather than those used
335 in Indented-Text mode.
338 ** M-x setenv now expands environment variable references.
340 Substrings of the form `$foo' and `${foo}' in the specified new value
341 now refer to the value of environment variable foo. To include a `$'
342 in the value, use `$$'.
345 ** `special-display-buffer-names' and `special-display-regexps' now
346 understand two new boolean pseudo-frame-parameters `same-frame' and
350 ** The default for the paper size (variable ps-paper-type) is taken
353 ** The command `list-faces-display' now accepts a prefix arg.
354 When passed, the function prompts for a regular expression and lists
355 only faces matching this regexp.
357 ** Mark command changes:
360 *** A prefix argument is no longer required to repeat a jump to a
361 previous mark, i.e. C-u C-SPC C-SPC C-SPC ... cycles through the
362 mark ring. Use C-u C-u C-SPC to set the mark immediately after a jump.
365 *** Marking commands extend the region when invoked multiple times.
367 If you type C-M-SPC (mark-sexp), M-@ (mark-word), M-h
368 (mark-paragraph), or C-M-h (mark-defun) repeatedly, the marked region
369 extends each time, so you can mark the next two sexps with M-C-SPC
370 M-C-SPC, for example. This feature also works for
371 mark-end-of-sentence, if you bind that to a key. It also extends the
372 region when the mark is active in Transient Mark mode, regardless of
373 the last command. To start a new region with one of marking commands
374 in Transient Mark mode, you can deactivate the active region with C-g,
375 or set the new mark with C-SPC.
378 *** M-h (mark-paragraph) now accepts a prefix arg.
380 With positive arg, M-h marks the current and the following paragraphs;
381 if the arg is negative, it marks the current and the preceding
385 *** Some commands do something special in Transient Mark mode when the
386 mark is active--for instance, they limit their operation to the
387 region. Even if you don't normally use Transient Mark mode, you might
388 want to get this behavior from a particular command. There are two
389 ways you can enable Transient Mark mode and activate the mark, for one
392 One method is to type C-SPC C-SPC; this enables Transient Mark mode
393 and sets the mark at point. The other method is to type C-u C-x C-x.
394 This enables Transient Mark mode temporarily but does not alter the
397 After these commands, Transient Mark mode remains enabled until you
398 deactivate the mark. That typically happens when you type a command
399 that alters the buffer, but you can also deactivate the mark by typing
403 *** Movement commands `beginning-of-buffer', `end-of-buffer',
404 `beginning-of-defun', `end-of-defun' do not set the mark if the mark
405 is already active in Transient Mark mode.
407 ** Help command changes:
410 *** Changes in C-h bindings:
412 C-h e displays the *Messages* buffer.
414 C-h followed by a control character is used for displaying files
417 C-h C-f displays the FAQ.
418 C-h C-e displays the PROBLEMS file.
420 The info-search bindings on C-h C-f, C-h C-k and C-h C-i
421 have been moved to C-h F, C-h K and C-h S.
423 C-h c, C-h k, C-h w, and C-h f now handle remapped interactive commands.
425 - C-h c and C-h k report the actual command (after possible remapping)
426 run by the key sequence.
428 - C-h w and C-h f on a command which has been remapped now report the
429 command it is remapped to, and the keys which can be used to run
432 For example, if C-k is bound to kill-line, and kill-line is remapped
433 to new-kill-line, these commands now report:
435 - C-h c and C-h k C-k reports:
436 C-k runs the command new-kill-line
438 - C-h w and C-h f kill-line reports:
439 kill-line is remapped to new-kill-line which is on C-k, <deleteline>
441 - C-h w and C-h f new-kill-line reports:
442 new-kill-line is on C-k
445 *** Help commands `describe-function' and `describe-key' now show function
446 arguments in lowercase italics on displays that support it. To change the
447 default, customize face `help-argument-name' or redefine the function
448 `help-default-arg-highlight'.
451 *** C-h v and C-h f commands now include a hyperlink to the C source for
452 variables and functions defined in C (if the C source is available).
455 *** Help mode now only makes hyperlinks for faces when the face name is
456 preceded or followed by the word `face'. It no longer makes
457 hyperlinks for variables without variable documentation, unless
458 preceded by one of the words `variable' or `option'. It now makes
459 hyperlinks to Info anchors (or nodes) if the anchor (or node) name is
460 enclosed in single quotes and preceded by `info anchor' or `Info
461 anchor' (in addition to earlier `info node' and `Info node').
464 *** The new command `describe-char' (C-u C-x =) pops up a buffer with
465 description various information about a character, including its
466 encodings and syntax, its text properties, how to input, overlays, and
467 widgets at point. You can get more information about some of them, by
468 clicking on mouse-sensitive areas or moving there and pressing RET.
471 *** The command `list-text-properties-at' has been deleted because
472 C-u C-x = gives the same information and more.
475 *** New command `display-local-help' displays any local help at point
476 in the echo area. It is bound to `C-h .'. It normally displays the
477 same string that would be displayed on mouse-over using the
478 `help-echo' property, but, in certain cases, it can display a more
479 keyboard oriented alternative.
482 *** New user option `help-at-pt-display-when-idle' allows to
483 automatically show the help provided by `display-local-help' on
484 point-over, after suitable idle time. The amount of idle time is
485 determined by the user option `help-at-pt-timer-delay' and defaults
486 to one second. This feature is turned off by default.
489 *** The apropos commands now accept a list of words to match.
490 When more than one word is specified, at least two of those words must
491 be present for an item to match. Regular expression matching is still
495 *** The new option `apropos-sort-by-scores' causes the matching items
496 to be sorted according to their score. The score for an item is a
497 number calculated to indicate how well the item matches the words or
498 regular expression that you entered to the apropos command. The best
499 match is listed first, and the calculated score is shown for each
502 ** Incremental Search changes:
505 *** Vertical scrolling is now possible within incremental search.
506 To enable this feature, customize the new user option
507 `isearch-allow-scroll'. User written commands which satisfy stringent
508 constraints can be marked as "scrolling commands". See the Emacs manual
512 *** C-w in incremental search now grabs either a character or a word,
513 making the decision in a heuristic way. This new job is done by the
514 command `isearch-yank-word-or-char'. To restore the old behavior,
515 bind C-w to `isearch-yank-word' in `isearch-mode-map'.
518 *** C-y in incremental search now grabs the next line if point is already
519 at the end of a line.
522 *** C-M-w deletes and C-M-y grabs a character in isearch mode.
523 Another method to grab a character is to enter the minibuffer by `M-e'
524 and to type `C-f' at the end of the search string in the minibuffer.
527 *** M-% typed in isearch mode invokes `query-replace' or
528 `query-replace-regexp' (depending on search mode) with the current
529 search string used as the string to replace.
532 *** Isearch no longer adds `isearch-resume' commands to the command
533 history by default. To enable this feature, customize the new
534 user option `isearch-resume-in-command-history'.
536 ** Replace command changes:
539 *** New user option `query-replace-skip-read-only': when non-nil,
540 `query-replace' and related functions simply ignore
541 a match if part of it has a read-only property.
544 *** When used interactively, the commands `query-replace-regexp' and
545 `replace-regexp' allow \,expr to be used in a replacement string,
546 where expr is an arbitrary Lisp expression evaluated at replacement
547 time. In many cases, this will be more convenient than using
548 `query-replace-regexp-eval'. `\#' in a replacement string now refers
549 to the count of replacements already made by the replacement command.
550 All regular expression replacement commands now allow `\?' in the
551 replacement string to specify a position where the replacement string
552 can be edited for each replacement.
555 *** query-replace uses isearch lazy highlighting when the new user option
556 `query-replace-lazy-highlight' is non-nil.
559 *** The current match in query-replace is highlighted in new face
560 `query-replace' which by default inherits from isearch face.
562 ** File operation changes:
565 *** Unquoted `$' in file names do not signal an error any more when
566 the corresponding environment variable does not exist.
567 Instead, the `$ENVVAR' text is left as is, so that `$$' quoting
568 is only rarely needed.
571 *** In processing a local variables list, Emacs strips the prefix and
572 suffix are from every line before processing all the lines.
575 *** find-file-read-only visits multiple files in read-only mode,
576 when the file name contains wildcard characters.
579 *** find-alternate-file replaces the current file with multiple files,
580 when the file name contains wildcard characters.
583 *** Auto Compression mode is now enabled by default.
586 *** C-x C-f RET, typing nothing in the minibuffer, is no longer a special case.
588 Since the default input is the current directory, this has the effect
589 of specifying the current directory. Normally that means to visit the
590 directory with Dired.
593 *** When you are root, and you visit a file whose modes specify
594 read-only, the Emacs buffer is now read-only too. Type C-x C-q if you
595 want to make the buffer writable. (As root, you can in fact alter the
599 *** C-x s (save-some-buffers) now offers an option `d' to diff a buffer
600 against its file, so you can see what changes you would be saving.
603 *** The commands copy-file, rename-file, make-symbolic-link and
604 add-name-to-file, when given a directory as the "new name" argument,
605 convert it to a file name by merging in the within-directory part of
606 the existing file's name. (This is the same convention that shell
607 commands cp, mv, and ln follow.) Thus, M-x copy-file RET ~/foo RET
608 /tmp RET copies ~/foo to /tmp/foo.
611 *** When used interactively, `format-write-file' now asks for confirmation
612 before overwriting an existing file, unless a prefix argument is
613 supplied. This behavior is analogous to `write-file'.
616 *** The variable `auto-save-file-name-transforms' now has a third element that
617 controls whether or not the function `make-auto-save-file-name' will
618 attempt to construct a unique auto-save name (e.g. for remote files).
621 *** The new option `write-region-inhibit-fsync' disables calls to fsync
622 in `write-region'. This can be useful on laptops to avoid spinning up
623 the hard drive upon each file save. Enabling this variable may result
624 in data loss, use with care.
627 *** If the user visits a file larger than `large-file-warning-threshold',
628 Emacs asks for confirmation.
631 *** require-final-newline now has two new possible values:
633 `visit' means add a newline (as an undoable change) if it's needed
634 when visiting the file.
636 `visit-save' means add a newline (as an undoable change) if it's
637 needed when visiting the file, and also add a newline if it's needed
638 when saving the file.
641 *** The new option mode-require-final-newline controls how certain
642 major modes enable require-final-newline. Any major mode that's
643 designed for a kind of file that should normally end in a newline
644 sets require-final-newline based on mode-require-final-newline.
645 So you can customize mode-require-final-newline to control what these
648 ** Minibuffer changes:
651 *** There's a new face `minibuffer-prompt'.
652 Emacs adds this face to the list of text properties stored in the
653 variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', which is used to display the
657 *** Enhanced visual feedback in `*Completions*' buffer.
659 Completions lists use faces to highlight what all completions
660 have in common and where they begin to differ.
662 The common prefix shared by all possible completions uses the face
663 `completions-common-part', while the first character that isn't the
664 same uses the face `completions-first-difference'. By default,
665 `completions-common-part' inherits from `default', and
666 `completions-first-difference' inherits from `bold'. The idea of
667 `completions-common-part' is that you can use it to make the common
668 parts less visible than normal, so that the rest of the differing
669 parts is, by contrast, slightly highlighted.
672 *** File-name completion can now ignore specified directories.
673 If an element of the list in `completion-ignored-extensions' ends in a
674 slash `/', it indicates a subdirectory that should be ignored when
675 completing file names. Elements of `completion-ignored-extensions'
676 which do not end in a slash are never considered when a completion
677 candidate is a directory.
680 *** The completion commands TAB, SPC and ? in the minibuffer apply only
681 to the text before point. If there is text in the buffer after point,
682 it remains unchanged.
685 *** New user option `history-delete-duplicates'.
686 If set to t when adding a new history element, all previous identical
687 elements are deleted.
689 ** Redisplay changes:
692 *** The mode line position information now comes before the major mode.
693 When the file is maintained under version control, that information
694 appears between the position information and the major mode.
697 *** New face `escape-glyph' highlights control characters and escape glyphs.
700 *** Non-breaking space and hyphens are now displayed with a special
701 face, either nobreak-space or escape-glyph. You can turn this off or
702 specify a different mode by setting the variable `nobreak-char-display'.
705 *** The parameters of automatic hscrolling can now be customized.
706 The variable `hscroll-margin' determines how many columns away from
707 the window edge point is allowed to get before automatic hscrolling
708 will horizontally scroll the window. The default value is 5.
710 The variable `hscroll-step' determines how many columns automatic
711 hscrolling scrolls the window when point gets too close to the
712 window edge. If its value is zero, the default, Emacs scrolls the
713 window so as to center point. If its value is an integer, it says how
714 many columns to scroll. If the value is a floating-point number, it
715 gives the fraction of the window's width to scroll the window.
717 The variable `automatic-hscrolling' was renamed to
718 `auto-hscroll-mode'. The old name is still available as an alias.
721 *** Moving or scrolling through images (and other lines) taller that
722 the window now works sensibly, by automatically adjusting the window's
726 *** The new face `mode-line-inactive' is used to display the mode line
727 of non-selected windows. The `mode-line' face is now used to display
728 the mode line of the currently selected window.
730 The new variable `mode-line-in-non-selected-windows' controls whether
731 the `mode-line-inactive' face is used.
734 *** You can now customize the use of window fringes. To control this
735 for all frames, use M-x fringe-mode or the Show/Hide submenu of the
736 top-level Options menu, or customize the `fringe-mode' variable. To
737 control this for a specific frame, use the command M-x
741 *** Angle icons in the fringes can indicate the buffer boundaries. In
742 addition, up and down arrow bitmaps in the fringe indicate which ways
743 the window can be scrolled.
745 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
746 `indicate-buffer-boundaries' to a non-nil value. The default value of
747 this variable is found in `default-indicate-buffer-boundaries'.
749 If value is `left' or `right', both angle and arrow bitmaps are
750 displayed in the left or right fringe, resp.
752 The value can also be an alist which specifies the presence and
753 position of each bitmap individually.
755 For example, ((top . left) (t . right)) places the top angle bitmap
756 in left fringe, the bottom angle bitmap in right fringe, and both
757 arrow bitmaps in right fringe. To show just the angle bitmaps in the
758 left fringe, but no arrow bitmaps, use ((top . left) (bottom . left)).
761 *** On window systems, lines which are exactly as wide as the window
762 (not counting the final newline character) are no longer broken into
763 two lines on the display (with just the newline on the second line).
764 Instead, the newline now "overflows" into the right fringe, and the
765 cursor will be displayed in the fringe when positioned on that newline.
767 The new user option 'overflow-newline-into-fringe' can be set to nil to
768 revert to the old behavior of continuing such lines.
771 *** When a window has display margin areas, the fringes are now
772 displayed between the margins and the buffer's text area, rather than
773 outside those margins.
776 *** A window can now have individual fringe and scroll-bar settings,
777 in addition to the individual display margin settings.
779 Such individual settings are now preserved when windows are split
780 horizontally or vertically, a saved window configuration is restored,
781 or when the frame is resized.
783 ** Cursor display changes:
786 *** On X, MS Windows, and Mac OS, the blinking cursor's "off" state is
787 now controlled by the variable `blink-cursor-alist'.
790 *** The X resource cursorBlink can be used to turn off cursor blinking.
793 *** Emacs can produce an underscore-like (horizontal bar) cursor.
794 The underscore cursor is set by putting `(cursor-type . hbar)' in
795 default-frame-alist. It supports variable heights, like the `bar'
799 *** Display of hollow cursors now obeys the buffer-local value (if any)
800 of `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' in the buffer that the cursor
804 *** The variable `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' can now be set to any
805 of the recognized cursor types.
810 *** `mode-line-highlight' is the standard face indicating mouse sensitive
811 elements on mode-line (and header-line) like `highlight' face on text
815 *** `shadow' face defines the appearance of the "shadowed" text, i.e.
816 the text which should be less noticeable than the surrounding text.
817 This can be achieved by using shades of grey in contrast with either
818 black or white default foreground color. This generic shadow face
819 allows customization of the appearance of shadowed text in one place,
820 so package-specific faces can inherit from it.
823 *** `vertical-border' face is used for the vertical divider between windows.
825 ** Font-Lock changes:
828 *** M-o now is the prefix key for setting text properties;
829 M-o M-o requests refontification.
832 *** All modes now support using M-x font-lock-mode to toggle
833 fontification, even those such as Occur, Info, and comint-derived
834 modes that do their own fontification in a special way.
836 The variable `Info-fontify' is no longer applicable; to disable
837 fontification in Info, remove `turn-on-font-lock' from
841 *** font-lock-lines-before specifies a number of lines before the
842 current line that should be refontified when you change the buffer.
843 The default value is 1.
846 *** font-lock: in modes like C and Lisp where the fontification assumes that
847 an open-paren in column 0 is always outside of any string or comment,
848 font-lock now highlights any such open-paren-in-column-zero in bold-red
849 if it is inside a string or a comment, to indicate that it can cause
850 trouble with fontification and/or indentation.
853 *** New standard font-lock face `font-lock-preprocessor-face'.
856 *** New standard font-lock face `font-lock-comment-delimiter-face'.
859 *** Easy to overlook single character negation can now be font-locked.
860 You can use the new variable `font-lock-negation-char-face' and the face of
861 the same name to customize this. Currently the cc-modes, sh-script-mode,
862 cperl-mode and make-mode support this.
865 *** The default settings for JIT stealth lock parameters are changed.
866 The default value for the user option jit-lock-stealth-time is now 16
867 instead of 3, and the default value of jit-lock-stealth-nice is now
868 0.5 instead of 0.125. The new defaults should lower the CPU usage
869 when Emacs is fontifying in the background.
872 *** jit-lock can now be delayed with `jit-lock-defer-time'.
874 If this variable is non-nil, its value should be the amount of Emacs
875 idle time in seconds to wait before starting fontification. For
876 example, if you set `jit-lock-defer-time' to 0.25, fontification will
877 only happen after 0.25s of idle time.
880 *** contextual refontification is now separate from stealth fontification.
882 jit-lock-defer-contextually is renamed jit-lock-contextually and
883 jit-lock-context-time determines the delay after which contextual
884 refontification takes place.
889 *** A menu item "Show/Hide" was added to the top-level menu "Options".
890 This menu allows you to turn various display features on and off (such
891 as the fringes, the tool bar, the speedbar, and the menu bar itself).
892 You can also move the vertical scroll bar to either side here or turn
893 it off completely. There is also a menu-item to toggle displaying of
894 current date and time, current line and column number in the mode-line.
897 *** Speedbar has moved from the "Tools" top level menu to "Show/Hide".
900 *** You can exit dialog windows and menus by typing C-g.
903 *** The menu item "Open File..." has been split into two items, "New File..."
904 and "Open File...". "Open File..." now opens only existing files. This is
905 to support existing GUI file selection dialogs better.
908 *** The file selection dialog for Gtk+, Mac, W32 and Motif/Lesstif can be
909 disabled by customizing the variable `use-file-dialog'.
912 *** The pop up menus for Lucid now stay up if you do a fast click and can
913 be navigated with the arrow keys (like Gtk+, Mac and W32).
916 *** The Lucid menus can display multilingual text in your locale. You have
917 to explicitly specify a fontSet resource for this to work, for example
918 `-xrm "Emacs*fontSet: -*-helvetica-medium-r-*--*-120-*-*-*-*-*-*,*"'.
921 *** Dialogs for Lucid/Athena and Lesstif/Motif now pops down when pressing
922 ESC, like they do for Gtk+, Mac and W32.
925 *** For Gtk+ version 2.4, you can make Emacs use the old file dialog
926 by setting the variable `x-use-old-gtk-file-dialog' to t. Default is to use
932 *** If you set the new variable `mouse-autoselect-window' to a non-nil
933 value, windows are automatically selected as you move the mouse from
934 one Emacs window to another, even within a frame. A minibuffer window
935 can be selected only when it is active.
938 *** On X, when the window manager requires that you click on a frame to
939 select it (give it focus), the selected window and cursor position
940 normally changes according to the mouse click position. If you set
941 the variable x-mouse-click-focus-ignore-position to t, the selected
942 window and cursor position do not change when you click on a frame
946 *** You can now follow links by clicking Mouse-1 on the link.
948 Traditionally, Emacs uses a Mouse-1 click to set point and a Mouse-2
949 click to follow a link, whereas most other applications use a Mouse-1
950 click for both purposes, depending on whether you click outside or
951 inside a link. Now the behavior of a Mouse-1 click has been changed
952 to match this context-sentitive dual behavior. (If you prefer the old
953 behavior, set the user option `mouse-1-click-follows-link' to nil.)
955 Depending on the current mode, a Mouse-2 click in Emacs can do much
956 more than just follow a link, so the new Mouse-1 behavior is only
957 activated for modes which explicitly mark a clickable text as a "link"
958 (see the new function `mouse-on-link-p' for details). The Lisp
959 packages that are included in release 22.1 have been adapted to do
960 this, but external packages may not yet support this. However, there
961 is no risk in using such packages, as the worst thing that could
962 happen is that you get the original Mouse-1 behavior when you click
963 on a link, which typically means that you set point where you click.
965 If you want to get the original Mouse-1 action also inside a link, you
966 just need to press the Mouse-1 button a little longer than a normal
967 click (i.e. press and hold the Mouse-1 button for half a second before
970 Dragging the Mouse-1 inside a link still performs the original
971 drag-mouse-1 action, typically copy the text.
973 You can customize the new Mouse-1 behavior via the new user options
974 `mouse-1-click-follows-link' and `mouse-1-click-in-non-selected-windows'.
977 *** Emacs normally highlights mouse sensitive text whenever the mouse
978 is over the text. By setting the new variable `mouse-highlight', you
979 can optionally enable mouse highlighting only after you move the
980 mouse, so that highlighting disappears when you press a key. You can
981 also disable mouse highlighting.
984 *** You can now customize if selecting a region by dragging the mouse
985 shall not copy the selected text to the kill-ring by setting the new
986 variable mouse-drag-copy-region to nil.
989 *** mouse-wheels can now scroll a specific fraction of the window
990 (rather than a fixed number of lines) and the scrolling is `progressive'.
993 *** Emacs ignores mouse-2 clicks while the mouse wheel is being moved.
995 People tend to push the mouse wheel (which counts as a mouse-2 click)
996 unintentionally while turning the wheel, so these clicks are now
997 ignored. You can customize this with the mouse-wheel-click-event and
998 mouse-wheel-inhibit-click-time variables.
1001 *** Under X, mouse-wheel-mode is turned on by default.
1003 ** Multilingual Environment (Mule) changes:
1006 *** Language environment and various default coding systems are setup
1007 more correctly according to the current locale name. If the locale
1008 name doesn't specify a charset, the default is what glibc defines.
1009 This change can result in using the different coding systems as
1010 default in some locale (e.g. vi_VN).
1013 *** The keyboard-coding-system is now automatically set based on your
1014 current locale settings if you are not using a window system. This
1015 can mean that the META key doesn't work but generates non-ASCII
1016 characters instead, depending on how the terminal (or terminal
1017 emulator) works. Use `set-keyboard-coding-system' (or customize
1018 keyboard-coding-system) if you prefer META to work (the old default)
1019 or if the locale doesn't describe the character set actually generated
1020 by the keyboard. See Info node `Single-Byte Character Support'.
1023 *** The new command `revert-buffer-with-coding-system' (C-x RET r)
1024 revisits the current file using a coding system that you specify.
1027 *** New command `recode-region' decodes the region again by a specified
1031 *** The new command `recode-file-name' changes the encoding of the name
1035 *** New command `ucs-insert' inserts a character specified by its
1039 *** The new command `set-file-name-coding-system' (C-x RET F) sets
1040 coding system for encoding and decoding file names. A new menu item
1041 (Options->Mule->Set Coding Systems->For File Name) invokes this
1045 *** New command quail-show-key shows what key (or key sequence) to type
1046 in the current input method to input a character at point.
1049 *** Limited support for character `unification' has been added.
1050 Emacs now knows how to translate between different representations of
1051 the same characters in various Emacs charsets according to standard
1052 Unicode mappings. This applies mainly to characters in the ISO 8859
1053 sets plus some other 8-bit sets, but can be extended. For instance,
1054 translation works amongst the Emacs ...-iso8859-... charsets and the
1055 mule-unicode-... ones.
1057 By default this translation happens automatically on encoding.
1058 Self-inserting characters are translated to make the input conformant
1059 with the encoding of the buffer in which it's being used, where
1062 You can force a more complete unification with the user option
1063 unify-8859-on-decoding-mode. That maps all the Latin-N character sets
1064 into Unicode characters (from the latin-iso8859-1 and
1065 mule-unicode-0100-24ff charsets) on decoding. Note that this mode
1066 will often effectively clobber data with an iso-2022 encoding.
1069 *** There is support for decoding Greek and Cyrillic characters into
1070 either Unicode (the mule-unicode charsets) or the iso-8859 charsets,
1071 when possible. The latter are more space-efficient. This is
1072 controlled by user option utf-fragment-on-decoding.
1075 *** New language environments: French, Ukrainian, Tajik,
1076 Bulgarian, Belarusian, Ukrainian, UTF-8, Windows-1255, Welsh, Latin-6,
1077 Latin-7, Lithuanian, Latvian, Swedish, Slovenian, Croatian, Georgian,
1078 Italian, Russian, Malayalam, Tamil, Russian, Chinese-EUC-TW. (Set up
1079 automatically according to the locale.)
1082 *** New input methods: latin-alt-postfix, latin-postfix, latin-prefix,
1083 ukrainian-computer, belarusian, bulgarian-bds, russian-computer,
1084 vietnamese-telex, lithuanian-numeric, lithuanian-keyboard,
1085 latvian-keyboard, welsh, georgian, rfc1345, ucs, sgml,
1086 bulgarian-phonetic, dutch, slovenian, croatian, malayalam-inscript,
1090 *** New input method chinese-sisheng for inputting Chinese Pinyin
1094 *** Improved Thai support. A new minor mode `thai-word-mode' (which is
1095 automatically activated if you select Thai as a language
1096 environment) changes key bindings of most word-oriented commands to
1097 versions which recognize Thai words. Affected commands are
1101 M-DEL (backward-kill-word)
1102 M-t (transpose-words)
1103 M-q (fill-paragraph)
1106 *** Indian support has been updated.
1107 The in-is13194 coding system is now Unicode-based. CDAC fonts are
1108 assumed. There is a framework for supporting various
1109 Indian scripts, but currently only Devanagari, Malayalam and Tamil are
1113 *** A UTF-7 coding system is available in the library `utf-7'.
1116 *** The utf-8/16 coding systems have been enhanced.
1117 By default, untranslatable utf-8 sequences are simply composed into
1118 single quasi-characters. User option `utf-translate-cjk-mode' (it is
1119 turned on by default) arranges to translate many utf-8 CJK character
1120 sequences into real Emacs characters in a similar way to the Mule-UCS
1121 system. As this loads a fairly big data on demand, people who are not
1122 interested in CJK characters may want to customize it to nil.
1123 You can augment/amend the CJK translation via hash tables
1124 `ucs-mule-cjk-to-unicode' and `ucs-unicode-to-mule-cjk'. The utf-8
1125 coding system now also encodes characters from most of Emacs's
1126 one-dimensional internal charsets, specifically the ISO-8859 ones.
1127 The utf-16 coding system is affected similarly.
1130 *** A new coding system `euc-tw' has been added for traditional Chinese
1131 in CNS encoding; it accepts both Big 5 and CNS as input; on saving,
1132 Big 5 is then converted to CNS.
1135 *** Many new coding systems are available in the `code-pages' library.
1136 These include complete versions of most of those in codepage.el, based
1137 on Unicode mappings. `codepage-setup' is now obsolete and is used
1138 only in the MS-DOS port of Emacs. All coding systems defined in
1139 `code-pages' are auto-loaded.
1142 *** New variable `utf-translate-cjk-unicode-range' controls which
1143 Unicode characters to translate in `utf-translate-cjk-mode'.
1146 *** iso-10646-1 (`Unicode') fonts can be used to display any range of
1147 characters encodable by the utf-8 coding system. Just specify the
1148 fontset appropriately.
1150 ** Customize changes:
1153 *** Custom themes are collections of customize options. Create a
1154 custom theme with M-x customize-create-theme. Use M-x load-theme to
1155 load and enable a theme, and M-x disable-theme to disable it. Use M-x
1156 enable-theme to renable a disabled theme.
1159 *** The commands M-x customize-face and M-x customize-face-other-window
1160 now look at the character after point. If a face or faces are
1161 specified for that character, the commands by default customize those
1165 *** The face-customization widget has been reworked to be less confusing.
1166 In particular, when you enable a face attribute using the corresponding
1167 check-box, there's no longer a redundant `*' option in value selection
1168 for that attribute; the values you can choose are only those which make
1169 sense for the attribute. When an attribute is de-selected by unchecking
1170 its check-box, then the (now ignored, but still present temporarily in
1171 case you re-select the attribute) value is hidden.
1174 *** When you set or reset a variable's value in a Customize buffer,
1175 the previous value becomes the "backup value" of the variable.
1176 You can go back to that backup value by selecting "Use Backup Value"
1177 under the "[State]" button.
1179 ** Buffer Menu changes:
1182 *** New command `Buffer-menu-toggle-files-only' toggles display of file
1183 buffers only in the Buffer Menu. It is bound to `T' in Buffer Menu
1187 *** `buffer-menu' and `list-buffers' now list buffers whose names begin
1188 with a space, when those buffers are visiting files. Normally buffers
1189 whose names begin with space are omitted.
1192 *** The new options `buffers-menu-show-directories' and
1193 `buffers-menu-show-status' let you control how buffers are displayed
1194 in the menu dropped down when you click "Buffers" from the menu bar.
1196 `buffers-menu-show-directories' controls whether the menu displays
1197 leading directories as part of the file name visited by the buffer.
1198 If its value is `unless-uniquify', the default, directories are
1199 shown unless uniquify-buffer-name-style' is non-nil. The value of nil
1200 and t turn the display of directories off and on, respectively.
1202 `buffers-menu-show-status' controls whether the Buffers menu includes
1203 the modified and read-only status of the buffers. By default it is
1204 t, and the status is shown.
1206 Setting these variables directly does not take effect until next time
1207 the Buffers menu is regenerated.
1212 *** New faces dired-header, dired-mark, dired-marked, dired-flagged,
1213 dired-ignored, dired-directory, dired-symlink, dired-warning
1214 introduced for Dired mode instead of font-lock faces.
1217 *** New Dired command `dired-compare-directories' marks files
1218 with different file attributes in two dired buffers.
1221 *** New Dired command `dired-do-touch' (bound to T) changes timestamps
1222 of marked files with the value entered in the minibuffer.
1225 *** In Dired's ! command (dired-do-shell-command), `*' and `?' now
1226 control substitution of the file names only when they are surrounded
1227 by whitespace. This means you can now use them as shell wildcards
1228 too. If you want to use just plain `*' as a wildcard, type `*""'; the
1229 doublequotes make no difference in the shell, but they prevent
1230 special treatment in `dired-do-shell-command'.
1233 *** In Dired, the w command now copies the current line's file name
1234 into the kill ring. With a zero prefix arg, copies absolute file names.
1237 *** In Dired-x, Omitting files is now a minor mode, dired-omit-mode.
1239 The mode toggling command is bound to M-o. A new command
1240 dired-mark-omitted, bound to * O, marks omitted files. The variable
1241 dired-omit-files-p is obsoleted, use the mode toggling function
1245 *** The variables dired-free-space-program and dired-free-space-args
1246 have been renamed to directory-free-space-program and
1247 directory-free-space-args, and they now apply whenever Emacs puts a
1248 directory listing into a buffer.
1253 *** The comint prompt can now be made read-only, using the new user
1254 option `comint-prompt-read-only'. This is not enabled by default,
1255 except in IELM buffers. The read-only status of IELM prompts can be
1256 controlled with the new user option `ielm-prompt-read-only', which
1257 overrides `comint-prompt-read-only'.
1259 The new commands `comint-kill-whole-line' and `comint-kill-region'
1260 support editing comint buffers with read-only prompts.
1262 `comint-kill-whole-line' is like `kill-whole-line', but ignores both
1263 read-only and field properties. Hence, it always kill entire
1264 lines, including any prompts.
1266 `comint-kill-region' is like `kill-region', except that it ignores
1267 read-only properties, if it is safe to do so. This means that if any
1268 part of a prompt is deleted, then the entire prompt must be deleted
1269 and that all prompts must stay at the beginning of a line. If this is
1270 not the case, then `comint-kill-region' behaves just like
1271 `kill-region' if read-only are involved: it copies the text to the
1272 kill-ring, but does not delete it.
1275 *** The new command `comint-insert-previous-argument' in comint-derived
1276 modes (shell-mode etc) inserts arguments from previous command lines,
1277 like bash's `ESC .' binding. It is bound by default to `C-c .', but
1278 otherwise behaves quite similarly to the bash version.
1281 *** `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields' has been renamed
1282 `comint-use-prompt-regexp'. The old name has been kept as an alias,
1283 but declared obsolete.
1285 ** M-x Compile changes:
1288 *** M-x compile has become more robust and reliable
1290 Quite a few more kinds of messages are recognized. Messages that are
1291 recognized as warnings or informational come in orange or green, instead of
1292 red. Informational messages are by default skipped with `next-error'
1293 (controlled by `compilation-skip-threshold').
1295 Location data is collected on the fly as the *compilation* buffer changes.
1296 This means you could modify messages to make them point to different files.
1297 This also means you can not go to locations of messages you may have deleted.
1299 The variable `compilation-error-regexp-alist' has now become customizable. If
1300 you had added your own regexps to this, you'll probably need to include a
1301 leading `^', otherwise they'll match anywhere on a line. There is now also a
1302 `compilation-mode-font-lock-keywords' and it nicely handles all the checks
1303 that configure outputs and -o options so you see at a glance where you are.
1305 The new file etc/compilation.txt gives examples of each type of message.
1308 *** New user option `compilation-environment'.
1309 This option allows you to specify environment variables for inferior
1310 compilation processes without affecting the environment that all
1311 subprocesses inherit.
1314 *** New user option `compilation-disable-input'.
1315 If this is non-nil, send end-of-file as compilation process input.
1318 *** New options `next-error-highlight' and `next-error-highlight-no-select'
1319 specify the method of highlighting of the corresponding source line
1320 in new face `next-error'.
1323 *** A new minor mode `next-error-follow-minor-mode' can be used in
1324 compilation-mode, grep-mode, occur-mode, and diff-mode (i.e. all the
1325 modes that can use `next-error'). In this mode, cursor motion in the
1326 buffer causes automatic display in another window of the corresponding
1327 matches, compilation errors, etc. This minor mode can be toggled with
1331 *** When the left fringe is displayed, an arrow points to current message in
1332 the compilation buffer.
1335 *** The new variable `compilation-context-lines' controls lines of leading
1336 context before the current message. If nil and the left fringe is displayed,
1337 it doesn't scroll the compilation output window. If there is no left fringe,
1338 no arrow is displayed and a value of nil means display the message at the top
1341 ** Occur mode changes:
1344 *** In the *Occur* buffer, `o' switches to it in another window, and
1345 C-o displays the current line's occurrence in another window without
1349 *** You can now use next-error (C-x `) and previous-error to advance to
1350 the next/previous matching line found by M-x occur.
1353 *** The new command `multi-occur' is just like `occur', except it can
1354 search multiple buffers. There is also a new command
1355 `multi-occur-by-filename-regexp' which allows you to specify the
1356 buffers to search by their filename. Internally, Occur mode has been
1357 rewritten, and now uses font-lock, among other changes.
1362 *** Grep has been decoupled from compilation mode setup.
1364 There's a new separate package grep.el, with its own submenu and
1365 customization group.
1368 *** M-x grep provides highlighting support.
1370 Hits are fontified in green, and hits in binary files in orange. Grep buffers
1371 can be saved and automatically revisited.
1374 *** `grep-find' is now also available under the name `find-grep' where
1375 people knowing `find-grep-dired' would probably expect it.
1378 *** The new variables `grep-window-height', `grep-auto-highlight', and
1379 `grep-scroll-output' override the corresponding compilation mode
1380 settings, for grep commands only.
1383 *** New option `grep-highlight-matches' highlightes matches in *grep*
1384 buffer. It uses a special feature of some grep programs which accept
1385 --color option to output markers around matches. When going to the next
1386 match with `next-error' the exact match is highlighted in the source
1387 buffer. Otherwise, if `grep-highlight-matches' is nil, the whole
1388 source line is highlighted.
1391 *** New key bindings in grep output window:
1392 SPC and DEL scrolls window up and down. C-n and C-p moves to next and
1393 previous match in the grep window. RET jumps to the source line of
1394 the current match. `n' and `p' shows next and previous match in
1395 other window, but does not switch buffer. `{' and `}' jumps to the
1396 previous or next file in the grep output. TAB also jumps to the next
1400 *** M-x grep now tries to avoid appending `/dev/null' to the command line
1401 by using GNU grep `-H' option instead. M-x grep automatically
1402 detects whether this is possible or not the first time it is invoked.
1403 When `-H' is used, the grep command line supplied by the user is passed
1404 unchanged to the system to execute, which allows more complicated
1405 command lines to be used than was possible before.
1407 ** X Windows Support:
1410 *** Emacs now supports drag and drop for X. Dropping a file on a window
1411 opens it, dropping text inserts the text. Dropping a file on a dired
1412 buffer copies or moves the file to that directory.
1415 *** Under X11, it is possible to swap Alt and Meta (and Super and Hyper).
1416 The new variables `x-alt-keysym', `x-hyper-keysym', `x-meta-keysym',
1417 and `x-super-keysym' can be used to choose which keysyms Emacs should
1418 use for the modifiers. For example, the following two lines swap
1420 (setq x-alt-keysym 'meta)
1421 (setq x-meta-keysym 'alt)
1424 *** The X resource useXIM can be used to turn off use of XIM, which can
1425 speed up Emacs with slow networking to the X server.
1427 If the configure option `--without-xim' was used to turn off use of
1428 XIM by default, the X resource useXIM can be used to turn it on.
1431 *** The new variable `x-select-request-type' controls how Emacs
1432 requests X selection. The default value is nil, which means that
1433 Emacs requests X selection with types COMPOUND_TEXT and UTF8_STRING,
1434 and use the more appropriately result.
1437 *** The scrollbar under LessTif or Motif has a smoother drag-scrolling.
1438 On the other hand, the size of the thumb does not represent the actual
1439 amount of text shown any more (only a crude approximation of it).
1444 *** Emacs now responds to mouse-clicks on the mode-line, header-line and
1445 display margin, when run in an xterm.
1448 *** Improved key bindings support when running in an xterm.
1449 When emacs is running in an xterm more key bindings are available. The
1450 following should work:
1451 {C,S,C-S,A}-{right,left,up,down,prior,next,delete,insert,F1-12}.
1452 These key bindings work on xterm from X.org 6.8, they might not work on
1453 some older versions of xterm, or on some proprietary versions.
1455 ** Character terminal color support changes:
1458 *** The new command-line option --color=MODE lets you specify a standard
1459 mode for a tty color support. It is meant to be used on character
1460 terminals whose capabilities are not set correctly in the terminal
1461 database, or with terminal emulators which support colors, but don't
1462 set the TERM environment variable to a name of a color-capable
1463 terminal. "emacs --color" uses the same color commands as GNU `ls'
1464 when invoked with "ls --color", so if your terminal can support colors
1465 in "ls --color", it will support "emacs --color" as well. See the
1466 user manual for the possible values of the MODE parameter.
1469 *** Emacs now supports several character terminals which provide more
1470 than 8 colors. For example, for `xterm', 16-color, 88-color, and
1471 256-color modes are supported. Emacs automatically notes at startup
1472 the extended number of colors, and defines the appropriate entries for
1473 all of these colors.
1476 *** Emacs now uses the full range of available colors for the default
1477 faces when running on a color terminal, including 16-, 88-, and
1478 256-color xterms. This means that when you run "emacs -nw" on an
1479 88-color or 256-color xterm, you will see essentially the same face
1483 *** There's a new support for colors on `rxvt' terminal emulator.
1485 * New Modes and Packages in Emacs 22.1
1488 ** Newsticker is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1490 Newsticker asynchronously retrieves headlines (RSS) from a list of news
1491 sites, prepares these headlines for reading, and allows for loading the
1492 corresponding articles in a web browser. Its documentation is in a
1496 ** Filesets are collections of files. You can define a fileset in
1497 various ways, such as based on a directory tree or based on
1498 program files that include other program files.
1500 Once you have defined a fileset, you can perform various operations on
1501 all the files in it, such as visiting them or searching and replacing
1505 ** Calc is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1507 Calc is an advanced desk calculator and mathematical tool written in
1508 Emacs Lisp. Its documentation is in a separate manual; within Emacs,
1509 type "C-h i m calc RET" to read that manual. A reference card is
1510 available in `etc/calccard.tex' and `etc/calccard.ps'.
1513 ** The new package ibuffer provides a powerful, completely
1514 customizable replacement for buff-menu.el.
1517 ** Ido mode is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1519 The ido (interactively do) package is an extension of the iswitchb
1520 package to do interactive opening of files and directories in addition
1521 to interactive buffer switching. Ido is a superset of iswitchb (with
1522 a few exceptions), so don't enable both packages.
1525 ** Image files are normally visited in Image mode, which lets you toggle
1526 between viewing the image and viewing the text using C-c C-c.
1529 ** CUA mode is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1531 The new cua package provides CUA-like keybindings using C-x for
1532 cut (kill), C-c for copy, C-v for paste (yank), and C-z for undo.
1533 With cua, the region can be set and extended using shifted movement
1534 keys (like pc-selection-mode) and typed text replaces the active
1535 region (like delete-selection-mode). Do not enable these modes with
1536 cua-mode. Customize the variable `cua-mode' to enable cua.
1538 In addition, cua provides unified rectangle support with visible
1539 rectangle highlighting: Use C-return to start a rectangle, extend it
1540 using the movement commands (or mouse-3), and cut or copy it using C-x
1541 or C-c (using C-w and M-w also works).
1543 Use M-o and M-c to `open' or `close' the rectangle, use M-b or M-f, to
1544 fill it with blanks or another character, use M-u or M-l to upcase or
1545 downcase the rectangle, use M-i to increment the numbers in the
1546 rectangle, use M-n to fill the rectangle with a numeric sequence (such
1547 as 10 20 30...), use M-r to replace a regexp in the rectangle, and use
1548 M-' or M-/ to restrict command on the rectangle to a subset of the
1549 rows. See the commentary in cua-base.el for more rectangle commands.
1551 Cua also provides unified support for registers: Use a numeric
1552 prefix argument between 0 and 9, i.e. M-0 .. M-9, for C-x, C-c, and
1553 C-v to cut or copy into register 0-9, or paste from register 0-9.
1555 The last text deleted (not killed) is automatically stored in
1556 register 0. This includes text deleted by typing text.
1558 Finally, cua provides a global mark which is set using S-C-space.
1559 When the global mark is active, any text which is cut or copied is
1560 automatically inserted at the global mark position. See the
1561 commentary in cua-base.el for more global mark related commands.
1563 The features of cua also works with the standard emacs bindings for
1564 kill, copy, yank, and undo. If you want to use cua mode, but don't
1565 want the C-x, C-c, C-v, and C-z bindings, you can customize the
1566 `cua-enable-cua-keys' variable.
1568 Note: This version of cua mode is not backwards compatible with older
1569 versions of cua.el and cua-mode.el. To ensure proper operation, you
1570 must remove older versions of cua.el or cua-mode.el as well as the
1571 loading and customization of those packages from the .emacs file.
1574 ** Org mode is now part of the Emacs distribution
1576 Org mode is a mode for keeping notes, maintaining ToDo lists, and
1577 doing project planning with a fast and effective plain-text system.
1578 It also contains a plain-text table editor with spreadsheet-like
1581 The Org mode table editor can be integrated into any major mode by
1582 activating the minor Orgtbl-mode.
1584 The documentation for org-mode is in a separate manual; within Emacs,
1585 type "C-h i m org RET" to read that manual. A reference card is
1586 available in `etc/orgcard.tex' and `etc/orgcard.ps'.
1589 ** The new package dns-mode.el add syntax highlight of DNS master files.
1590 The key binding C-c C-s (`dns-mode-soa-increment-serial') can be used
1591 to increment the SOA serial.
1594 ** The new global minor mode `file-name-shadow-mode' modifies the way
1595 filenames being entered by the user in the minibuffer are displayed, so
1596 that it's clear when part of the entered filename will be ignored due to
1597 emacs' filename parsing rules. The ignored portion can be made dim,
1598 invisible, or otherwise less visually noticable. The display method can
1599 be displayed by customizing the variable `file-name-shadow-properties'.
1602 ** The new package flymake.el does on-the-fly syntax checking of program
1603 source files. See the Flymake's Info manual for more details.
1606 ** The new keypad setup package provides several common bindings for
1607 the numeric keypad which is available on most keyboards. The numeric
1608 keypad typically has the digits 0 to 9, a decimal point, keys marked
1609 +, -, /, and *, an Enter key, and a NumLock toggle key. The keypad
1610 package only controls the use of the digit and decimal keys.
1612 By customizing the variables `keypad-setup', `keypad-shifted-setup',
1613 `keypad-numlock-setup', and `keypad-numlock-shifted-setup', or by
1614 using the function `keypad-setup', you can rebind all digit keys and
1615 the decimal key of the keypad in one step for each of the four
1616 possible combinations of the Shift key state (not pressed/pressed) and
1617 the NumLock toggle state (off/on).
1619 The choices for the keypad keys in each of the above states are:
1620 `Plain numeric keypad' where the keys generates plain digits,
1621 `Numeric keypad with decimal key' where the character produced by the
1622 decimal key can be customized individually (for internationalization),
1623 `Numeric Prefix Arg' where the keypad keys produce numeric prefix args
1624 for emacs editing commands, `Cursor keys' and `Shifted Cursor keys'
1625 where the keys work like (shifted) arrow keys, home/end, etc., and
1626 `Unspecified/User-defined' where the keypad keys (kp-0, kp-1, etc.)
1627 are left unspecified and can be bound individually through the global
1631 ** The new kmacro package provides a simpler user interface to
1632 emacs' keyboard macro facilities.
1634 Basically, it uses two function keys (default F3 and F4) like this:
1635 F3 starts a macro, F4 ends the macro, and pressing F4 again executes
1636 the last macro. While defining the macro, F3 inserts a counter value
1637 which automatically increments every time the macro is executed.
1639 There is now a keyboard macro ring which stores the most recently
1642 The C-x C-k sequence is now a prefix for the kmacro keymap which
1643 defines bindings for moving through the keyboard macro ring,
1644 C-x C-k C-p and C-x C-k C-n, editing the last macro C-x C-k C-e,
1645 manipulating the macro counter and format via C-x C-k C-c,
1646 C-x C-k C-a, and C-x C-k C-f. See the commentary in kmacro.el
1649 The normal macro bindings C-x (, C-x ), and C-x e now interfaces to
1650 the keyboard macro ring.
1652 The C-x e command now automatically terminates the current macro
1653 before calling it, if used while defining a macro.
1655 In addition, when ending or calling a macro with C-x e, the macro can
1656 be repeated immediately by typing just the `e'. You can customize
1657 this behavior via the variables kmacro-call-repeat-key and
1658 kmacro-call-repeat-with-arg.
1660 Keyboard macros can now be debugged and edited interactively.
1661 C-x C-k SPC steps through the last keyboard macro one key sequence
1662 at a time, prompting for the actions to take.
1665 ** New minor mode, Visible mode, toggles invisibility in the current buffer.
1666 When enabled, it makes all invisible text visible. When disabled, it
1667 restores the previous value of `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
1670 ** The wdired.el package allows you to use normal editing commands on Dired
1671 buffers to change filenames, permissions, etc...
1674 ** The new package longlines.el provides a minor mode for editing text
1675 files composed of long lines, based on the `use-hard-newlines'
1676 mechanism. The long lines are broken up by inserting soft newlines,
1677 which are automatically removed when saving the file to disk or
1678 copying into the kill ring, clipboard, etc. By default, Longlines
1679 mode inserts soft newlines automatically during editing, a behavior
1680 referred to as "soft word wrap" in other text editors. This is
1681 similar to Refill mode, but more reliable. To turn the word wrap
1682 feature off, set `longlines-auto-wrap' to nil.
1685 ** The printing package is now part of the Emacs distribution.
1687 If you enable the printing package by including (require 'printing) in
1688 the .emacs file, the normal Print item on the File menu is replaced
1689 with a Print sub-menu which allows you to preview output through
1690 ghostview, use ghostscript to print (if you don't have a PostScript
1691 printer) or send directly to printer a PostScript code generated by
1692 `ps-print' package. Use M-x pr-help for more information.
1695 ** The minor mode Reveal mode makes text visible on the fly as you
1696 move your cursor into hidden regions of the buffer.
1697 It should work with any package that uses overlays to hide parts
1698 of a buffer, such as outline-minor-mode, hs-minor-mode, hide-ifdef-mode, ...
1700 There is also Global Reveal mode which affects all buffers.
1703 ** The ruler-mode.el library provides a minor mode for displaying an
1704 "active" ruler in the header line. You can use the mouse to visually
1705 change the `fill-column', `window-margins' and `tab-stop-list'
1709 ** SES mode (ses-mode) is a new major mode for creating and editing
1710 spreadsheet files. Besides the usual Emacs features (intuitive command
1711 letters, undo, cell formulas in Lisp, plaintext files, etc.) it also offers
1712 viral immunity and import/export of tab-separated values.
1715 ** The new global minor mode `size-indication-mode' (off by default)
1716 shows the size of accessible part of the buffer on the mode line.
1719 ** The new package table.el implements editable, WYSIWYG, embedded
1720 `text tables' in Emacs buffers. It simulates the effect of putting
1721 these tables in a special major mode. The package emulates WYSIWYG
1722 table editing available in modern word processors. The package also
1723 can generate a table source in typesetting and markup languages such
1724 as latex and html from the visually laid out text table.
1727 ** The thumbs.el package allows you to preview image files as thumbnails
1728 and can be invoked from a Dired buffer.
1731 ** Tramp is now part of the distribution.
1733 This package is similar to Ange-FTP: it allows you to edit remote
1734 files. But whereas Ange-FTP uses FTP to access the remote host,
1735 Tramp uses a shell connection. The shell connection is always used
1736 for filename completion and directory listings and suchlike, but for
1737 the actual file transfer, you can choose between the so-called
1738 `inline' methods (which transfer the files through the shell
1739 connection using base64 or uu encoding) and the `out-of-band' methods
1740 (which invoke an external copying program such as `rcp' or `scp' or
1741 `rsync' to do the copying).
1743 Shell connections can be acquired via `rsh', `ssh', `telnet' and also
1744 `su' and `sudo'. Ange-FTP is still supported via the `ftp' method.
1746 If you want to disable Tramp you should set
1748 (setq tramp-default-method "ftp")
1751 ** The URL package (which had been part of W3) is now part of Emacs.
1754 ** `cfengine-mode' is a major mode for editing GNU Cfengine
1755 configuration files.
1758 ** The new package conf-mode.el handles thousands of configuration files, with
1759 varying syntaxes for comments (;, #, //, /* */ or !), assignment (var = value,
1760 var : value, var value or keyword var value) and sections ([section] or
1761 section { }). Many files under /etc/, or with suffixes like .cf through
1762 .config, .properties (Java), .desktop (KDE/Gnome), .ini and many others are
1766 ** GDB-Script-mode is used for files like .gdbinit.
1769 ** The new python.el package is used to edit Python and Jython programs.
1772 ** The TCL package tcl-mode.el was replaced by tcl.el.
1773 This was actually done in Emacs-21.1, and was not documented.
1775 ** The new package scroll-lock.el provides the Scroll Lock minor mode
1776 for pager-like scrolling. Keys which normally move point by line or
1777 paragraph will scroll the buffer by the respective amount of lines
1778 instead and point will be kept vertically fixed relative to window
1779 boundaries during scrolling.
1781 * Changes in Specialized Modes and Packages in Emacs 22.1:
1783 ** The variable `woman-topic-at-point' was renamed
1784 to `woman-use-topic-at-point' and behaves differently: if this
1785 variable is non-nil, the `woman' command uses the word at point
1786 automatically, without asking for a confirmation. Otherwise, the word
1787 at point is suggested as default, but not inserted at the prompt.
1790 ** Changes to cmuscheme
1792 *** Emacs now offers to start Scheme if the user tries to
1793 evaluate a Scheme expression but no Scheme subprocess is running.
1795 *** If a file `.emacs_NAME' (where NAME is the name of the Scheme interpreter)
1796 exists in the user's home directory or in ~/.emacs.d, its
1797 contents are sent to the Scheme subprocess upon startup.
1799 *** There are new commands to instruct the Scheme interpreter to trace
1800 procedure calls (`scheme-trace-procedure') and to expand syntactic forms
1801 (`scheme-expand-current-form'). The commands actually sent to the Scheme
1802 subprocess are controlled by the user options `scheme-trace-command',
1803 `scheme-untrace-command' and `scheme-expand-current-form'.
1806 ** Makefile mode has submodes for automake, gmake, makepp and BSD make.
1808 The former two couldn't be differentiated before, and the latter two
1809 are new. Font-locking is robust now and offers new customizable
1813 ** In Outline mode, `hide-body' no longer hides lines at the top
1814 of the file that precede the first header line.
1817 ** Telnet now prompts you for a port number with C-u M-x telnet.
1820 ** The terminal emulation code in term.el has been improved; it can
1821 run most curses applications now.
1824 ** M-x diff uses Diff mode instead of Compilation mode.
1827 ** You can now customize `fill-nobreak-predicate' to control where
1828 filling can break lines. The value is now normally a list of
1829 functions, but it can also be a single function, for compatibility.
1831 Emacs provide two predicates, `fill-single-word-nobreak-p' and
1832 `fill-french-nobreak-p', for use as the value of
1833 `fill-nobreak-predicate'.
1836 ** M-x view-file and commands that use it now avoid interfering
1837 with special modes such as Tar mode.
1840 ** Commands `winner-redo' and `winner-undo', from winner.el, are now
1841 bound to C-c <left> and C-c <right>, respectively. This is an
1842 incompatible change.
1845 ** `global-whitespace-mode' is a new alias for `whitespace-global-mode'.
1848 ** M-x compare-windows now can automatically skip non-matching text to
1849 resync points in both windows.
1852 ** New user option `add-log-always-start-new-record'.
1854 When this option is enabled, M-x add-change-log-entry always
1855 starts a new record regardless of when the last record is.
1858 ** PO translation files are decoded according to their MIME headers
1859 when Emacs visits them.
1861 ** Info mode changes:
1864 *** A numeric prefix argument of `info' selects an Info buffer
1865 with the number appended to the `*info*' buffer name (e.g. "*info*<2>").
1868 *** isearch in Info uses Info-search and searches through multiple nodes.
1870 Before leaving the initial Info node isearch fails once with the error
1871 message [initial node], and with subsequent C-s/C-r continues through
1872 other nodes. When isearch fails for the rest of the manual, it wraps
1873 aroung the whole manual to the top/final node. The user option
1874 `Info-isearch-search' controls whether to use Info-search for isearch,
1875 or the default isearch search function that wraps around the current
1879 *** New search commands: `Info-search-case-sensitively' (bound to S),
1880 `Info-search-backward', and `Info-search-next' which repeats the last
1881 search without prompting for a new search string.
1884 *** New command `Info-history-forward' (bound to r and new toolbar icon)
1885 moves forward in history to the node you returned from after using
1886 `Info-history-back' (renamed from `Info-last').
1889 *** New command `Info-history' (bound to L) displays a menu of visited nodes.
1892 *** New command `Info-toc' (bound to T) creates a node with table of contents
1893 from the tree structure of menus of the current Info file.
1896 *** New command `info-apropos' searches the indices of the known
1897 Info files on your system for a string, and builds a menu of the
1901 *** New command `Info-copy-current-node-name' (bound to w) copies
1902 the current Info node name into the kill ring. With a zero prefix
1903 arg, puts the node name inside the `info' function call.
1906 *** New face `info-xref-visited' distinguishes visited nodes from unvisited
1907 and a new option `Info-fontify-visited-nodes' to control this.
1910 *** http and ftp links in Info are now operational: they look like cross
1911 references and following them calls `browse-url'.
1914 *** Info now hides node names in menus and cross references by default.
1916 If you prefer the old behavior, you can set the new user option
1917 `Info-hide-note-references' to nil.
1920 *** Images in Info pages are supported.
1922 Info pages show embedded images, in Emacs frames with image support.
1923 Info documentation that includes images, processed with makeinfo
1924 version 4.7 or newer, compiles to Info pages with embedded images.
1927 *** The default value for `Info-scroll-prefer-subnodes' is now nil.
1930 *** `Info-index' offers completion.
1932 ** Lisp mode changes:
1935 *** Lisp mode now uses `font-lock-doc-face' for doc strings.
1938 *** C-u C-M-q in Emacs Lisp mode pretty-prints the list after point.
1940 *** New features in evaluation commands
1943 **** The function `eval-defun' (C-M-x) called on defface reinitializes
1944 the face to the value specified in the defface expression.
1947 **** Typing C-x C-e twice prints the value of the integer result
1948 in additional formats (octal, hexadecimal, character) specified
1949 by the new function `eval-expression-print-format'. The same
1950 function also defines the result format for `eval-expression' (M-:),
1951 `eval-print-last-sexp' (C-j) and some edebug evaluation functions.
1956 *** Font lock support.
1957 CC Mode now provides font lock support for all its languages. This
1958 supersedes the font lock patterns that have been in the core font lock
1959 package for C, C++, Java and Objective-C. Like indentation, font
1960 locking is done in a uniform way across all languages (except the new
1961 AWK mode - see below). That means that the new font locking will be
1962 different from the old patterns in various details for most languages.
1964 The main goal of the font locking in CC Mode is accuracy, to provide a
1965 dependable aid in recognizing the various constructs. Some, like
1966 strings and comments, are easy to recognize while others like
1967 declarations and types can be very tricky. CC Mode can go to great
1968 lengths to recognize declarations and casts correctly, especially when
1969 the types aren't recognized by standard patterns. This is a fairly
1970 demanding analysis which can be slow on older hardware, and it can
1971 therefore be disabled by choosing a lower decoration level with the
1972 variable font-lock-maximum-decoration.
1974 Note that the most demanding font lock level has been tuned with lazy
1975 fontification in mind, i.e. there should be a support mode that waits
1976 with the fontification until the text is actually shown
1977 (e.g. Just-in-time Lock mode, which is the default, or Lazy Lock
1978 mode). Fontifying a file with several thousand lines in one go can
1979 take the better part of a minute.
1981 **** The (c|c++|objc|java|idl|pike)-font-lock-extra-types variables
1982 are now used by CC Mode to recognize identifiers that are certain to
1983 be types. (They are also used in cases that aren't related to font
1984 locking.) At the maximum decoration level, types are often recognized
1985 properly anyway, so these variables should be fairly restrictive and
1986 not contain patterns for uncertain types.
1988 **** Support for documentation comments.
1989 There is a "plugin" system to fontify documentation comments like
1990 Javadoc and the markup within them. It's independent of the host
1991 language, so it's possible to e.g. turn on Javadoc font locking in C
1992 buffers. See the variable c-doc-comment-style for details.
1994 Currently two kinds of doc comment styles are recognized: Suns Javadoc
1995 and Autodoc which is used in Pike. This is by no means a complete
1996 list of the most common tools; if your doc comment extractor of choice
1997 is missing then please drop a note to bug-cc-mode@gnu.org.
1999 **** Better handling of C++ templates.
2000 As a side effect of the more accurate font locking, C++ templates are
2001 now handled much better. The angle brackets that delimit them are
2002 given parenthesis syntax so that they can be navigated like other
2005 This also improves indentation of templates, although there still is
2006 work to be done in that area. E.g. it's required that multiline
2007 template clauses are written in full and then refontified to be
2008 recognized, and the indentation of nested templates is a bit odd and
2009 not as configurable as it ought to be.
2011 **** Improved handling of Objective-C and CORBA IDL.
2012 Especially the support for Objective-C and IDL has gotten an overhaul.
2013 The special "@" declarations in Objective-C are handled correctly.
2014 All the keywords used in CORBA IDL, PSDL, and CIDL are recognized and
2015 handled correctly, also wrt indentation.
2017 *** Support for the AWK language.
2018 Support for the AWK language has been introduced. The implementation is
2019 based around GNU AWK version 3.1, but it should work pretty well with
2020 any AWK. As yet, not all features of CC Mode have been adapted for AWK.
2023 **** Indentation Engine
2024 The CC Mode indentation engine fully supports AWK mode.
2026 AWK mode handles code formatted in the conventional AWK fashion: `{'s
2027 which start actions, user-defined functions, or compound statements are
2028 placed on the same line as the associated construct; the matching `}'s
2029 are normally placed under the start of the respective pattern, function
2030 definition, or structured statement.
2032 The predefined indentation functions haven't yet been adapted for AWK
2033 mode, though some of them may work serendipitously. There shouldn't be
2034 any problems writing custom indentation functions for AWK mode.
2036 The command C-c C-q (c-indent-defun) hasn't yet been adapted for AWK,
2037 though in practice it works properly nearly all the time. Should it
2038 fail, explicitly set the region around the function (using C-u C-SPC:
2039 C-M-h probably won't work either) then do C-M-\ (indent-region).
2042 There is a single level of font locking in AWK mode, rather than the
2043 three distinct levels the other modes have. There are several
2044 idiosyncrasies in AWK mode's font-locking due to the peculiarities of
2045 the AWK language itself.
2047 **** Comment Commands
2048 M-; (indent-for-comment) works fine. None of the other CC Mode
2049 comment formatting commands have yet been adapted for AWK mode.
2051 **** Movement Commands
2052 Most of the movement commands work in AWK mode. The most important
2053 exceptions are M-a (c-beginning-of-statement) and M-e
2054 (c-end-of-statement) which haven't yet been adapted.
2056 The notion of "defun" has been augmented to include AWK pattern-action
2057 pairs. C-M-a (c-awk-beginning-of-defun) and C-M-e (c-awk-end-of-defun)
2058 recognize these pattern-action pairs, as well as user defined
2061 **** Auto-newline Insertion and Clean-ups
2062 Auto-newline insertion hasn't yet been adapted for AWK. Some of
2063 the clean-ups can actually convert good AWK code into syntactically
2064 invalid code. These features are best disabled in AWK buffers.
2066 *** New syntactic symbols in IDL mode.
2067 The top level constructs "module" and "composition" (from CIDL) are
2068 now handled like "namespace" in C++: They are given syntactic symbols
2069 module-open, module-close, inmodule, composition-open,
2070 composition-close, and incomposition.
2072 *** New functions to do hungry delete without enabling hungry delete mode.
2073 The functions `c-hungry-backspace' and `c-hungry-delete-forward' can be
2074 bound to keys to get this feature without toggling a mode.
2076 *** Better control over `require-final-newline'.
2078 The variable `c-require-final-newline' specifies which of the modes
2079 implemented by CC mode should insert final newlines. Its value is a
2080 list of modes, and only those modes should do it. By default the list
2081 includes C, C++ and Objective-C modes.
2083 Whichever modes are in this list will set `require-final-newline'
2084 based on `mode-require-final-newline'.
2086 *** Format change for syntactic context elements.
2088 The elements in the syntactic context returned by `c-guess-basic-syntax'
2089 and stored in `c-syntactic-context' has been changed somewhat to allow
2090 attaching more information. They are now lists instead of single cons
2091 cells. E.g. a line that previously had the syntactic analysis
2093 ((inclass . 11) (topmost-intro . 13))
2097 ((inclass 11) (topmost-intro 13))
2099 In some cases there are more than one position given for a syntactic
2102 This change might affect code that call `c-guess-basic-syntax' directly,
2103 and custom lineup functions if they use `c-syntactic-context'. However,
2104 the argument given to lineup functions is still a single cons cell
2105 with nil or an integer in the cdr.
2107 *** API changes for derived modes.
2109 There have been extensive changes "under the hood" which can affect
2110 derived mode writers. Some of these changes are likely to cause
2111 incompatibilities with existing derived modes, but on the other hand
2112 care has now been taken to make it possible to extend and modify CC
2113 Mode with less risk of such problems in the future.
2115 **** New language variable system.
2116 See the comment blurb near the top of cc-langs.el.
2118 **** New initialization functions.
2119 The initialization procedure has been split up into more functions to
2120 give better control: `c-basic-common-init', `c-font-lock-init', and
2121 `c-init-language-vars'.
2123 *** Changes in analysis of nested syntactic constructs.
2124 The syntactic analysis engine has better handling of cases where
2125 several syntactic constructs appear nested on the same line. They are
2126 now handled as if each construct started on a line of its own.
2128 This means that CC Mode now indents some cases differently, and
2129 although it's more consistent there might be cases where the old way
2130 gave results that's more to one's liking. So if you find a situation
2131 where you think that the indentation has become worse, please report
2132 it to bug-cc-mode@gnu.org.
2134 **** New syntactic symbol substatement-label.
2135 This symbol is used when a label is inserted between a statement and
2136 its substatement. E.g:
2142 *** Better handling of multiline macros.
2144 **** Syntactic indentation inside macros.
2145 The contents of multiline #define's are now analyzed and indented
2146 syntactically just like other code. This can be disabled by the new
2147 variable `c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros'. A new syntactic symbol
2148 `cpp-define-intro' has been added to control the initial indentation
2151 **** New lineup function `c-lineup-cpp-define'.
2153 Now used by default to line up macro continuation lines. The behavior
2154 of this function closely mimics the indentation one gets if the macro
2155 is indented while the line continuation backslashes are temporarily
2156 removed. If syntactic indentation in macros is turned off, it works
2157 much line `c-lineup-dont-change', which was used earlier, but handles
2158 empty lines within the macro better.
2160 **** Automatically inserted newlines continues the macro if used within one.
2161 This applies to the newlines inserted by the auto-newline mode, and to
2162 `c-context-line-break' and `c-context-open-line'.
2164 **** Better alignment of line continuation backslashes.
2165 `c-backslash-region' tries to adapt to surrounding backslashes. New
2166 variable `c-backslash-max-column' which put a limit on how far out
2167 backslashes can be moved.
2169 **** Automatic alignment of line continuation backslashes.
2170 This is controlled by the new variable `c-auto-align-backslashes'. It
2171 affects `c-context-line-break', `c-context-open-line' and newlines
2172 inserted in Auto-Newline mode.
2173 **** Line indentation works better inside macros.
2175 Regardless whether syntactic indentation and syntactic indentation
2176 inside macros are enabled or not, line indentation now ignores the
2177 line continuation backslashes. This is most noticeable when syntactic
2178 indentation is turned off and there are empty lines (save for the
2179 backslash) in the macro.
2181 *** indent-for-comment is more customizable.
2182 The behavior of M-; (indent-for-comment) is now configurable through
2183 the variable `c-indent-comment-alist'. The indentation behavior based
2184 on the preceding code on the line, e.g. to get two spaces after #else
2185 and #endif but indentation to `comment-column' in most other cases
2186 (something which was hardcoded earlier).
2188 *** New function `c-context-open-line'.
2189 It's the open-line equivalent of `c-context-line-break'.
2191 *** New lineup functions
2193 **** `c-lineup-string-cont'
2194 This lineup function lines up a continued string under the one it
2197 result = prefix + "A message "
2198 "string."; <- c-lineup-string-cont
2200 **** `c-lineup-cascaded-calls'
2201 Lines up series of calls separated by "->" or ".".
2203 **** `c-lineup-knr-region-comment'
2204 Gives (what most people think is) better indentation of comments in
2205 the "K&R region" between the function header and its body.
2207 **** `c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg'
2208 Provides better indentation inside asm blocks.
2210 **** `c-lineup-argcont'
2211 Lines up continued function arguments after the preceding comma.
2213 *** Better caching of the syntactic context.
2214 CC Mode caches the positions of the opening parentheses (of any kind)
2215 of the lists surrounding the point. Those positions are used in many
2216 places as anchor points for various searches. The cache is now
2217 improved so that it can be reused to a large extent when the point is
2218 moved. The less it moves, the less needs to be recalculated.
2220 The effect is that CC Mode should be fast most of the time even when
2221 opening parens are hung (i.e. aren't in column zero). It's typically
2222 only the first time after the point is moved far down in a complex
2223 file that it'll take noticeable time to find out the syntactic
2226 *** Statements are recognized in a more robust way.
2227 Statements are recognized most of the time even when they occur in an
2228 "invalid" context, e.g. in a function argument. In practice that can
2229 happen when macros are involved.
2231 *** Improved the way `c-indent-exp' chooses the block to indent.
2232 It now indents the block for the closest sexp following the point
2233 whose closing paren ends on a different line. This means that the
2234 point doesn't have to be immediately before the block to indent.
2235 Also, only the block and the closing line is indented; the current
2236 line is left untouched.
2238 *** Added toggle for syntactic indentation.
2239 The function `c-toggle-syntactic-indentation' can be used to toggle
2240 syntactic indentation.
2242 ** In sh-script, a continuation line is only indented if the backslash was
2243 preceded by a SPC or a TAB.
2246 ** Perl mode has a new variable `perl-indent-continued-arguments'.
2249 ** The old Octave mode bindings C-c f and C-c i have been changed
2250 to C-c C-f and C-c C-i. The C-c C-i subcommands now have duplicate
2251 bindings on control characters--thus, C-c C-i C-b is the same as
2252 C-c C-i b, and so on.
2254 ** Fortran mode changes:
2257 *** Fortran mode does more font-locking by default. Use level 3
2258 highlighting for the old default.
2261 *** Fortran mode has a new variable `fortran-directive-re'.
2262 Adapt this to match the format of any compiler directives you use.
2263 Lines that match are never indented, and are given distinctive font-locking.
2266 *** F90 mode and Fortran mode have new navigation commands
2267 `f90-end-of-block', `f90-beginning-of-block', `f90-next-block',
2268 `f90-previous-block', `fortran-end-of-block',
2269 `fortran-beginning-of-block'.
2272 *** F90 mode and Fortran mode have support for `hs-minor-mode' (hideshow).
2273 It cannot deal with every code format, but ought to handle a sizeable
2277 *** The new function `f90-backslash-not-special' can be used to change
2278 the syntax of backslashes in F90 buffers.
2281 ** Reftex mode changes
2283 *** Changes to RefTeX's table of contents
2285 The new command keys "<" and ">" in the TOC buffer promote/demote the
2286 section at point or all sections in the current region, with full
2287 support for multifile documents.
2289 The new command `reftex-toc-recenter' (`C-c -') shows the current
2290 section in the TOC buffer without selecting the TOC window.
2291 Recentering can happen automatically in idle time when the option
2292 `reftex-auto-recenter-toc' is turned on. The highlight in the TOC
2293 buffer stays when the focus moves to a different window. A dedicated
2294 frame can show the TOC with the current section always automatically
2295 highlighted. The frame is created and deleted from the toc buffer
2298 The toc window can be split off horizontally instead of vertically.
2299 See new option `reftex-toc-split-windows-horizontally'.
2301 Labels can be renamed globally from the table of contents using the
2304 The new command `reftex-goto-label' jumps directly to a label
2308 *** Changes related to citations and BibTeX database files
2310 Commands that insert a citation now prompt for optional arguments when
2311 called with a prefix argument. Related new options are
2312 `reftex-cite-prompt-optional-args' and `reftex-cite-cleanup-optional-args'.
2314 The new command `reftex-create-bibtex-file' creates a BibTeX database
2315 with all entries referenced in the current document. The keys "e" and
2316 "E" allow to produce a BibTeX database file from entries marked in a
2317 citation selection buffer.
2319 The command `reftex-citation' uses the word in the buffer before the
2320 cursor as a default search string.
2322 The support for chapterbib has been improved. Different chapters can
2323 now use BibTeX or an explicit `thebibliography' environment.
2325 The macros which specify the bibliography file (like \bibliography)
2326 can be configured with the new option `reftex-bibliography-commands'.
2328 Support for jurabib has been added.
2331 *** Global index matched may be verified with a user function
2333 During global indexing, a user function can verify an index match.
2334 See new option `reftex-index-verify-function'.
2337 *** Parsing documents with many labels can be sped up.
2339 Operating in a document with thousands of labels can be sped up
2340 considerably by allowing RefTeX to derive the type of a label directly
2341 from the label prefix like `eq:' or `fig:'. The option
2342 `reftex-trust-label-prefix' needs to be configured in order to enable
2343 this feature. While the speed-up is significant, this may reduce the
2344 quality of the context offered by RefTeX to describe a label.
2347 *** Miscellaneous changes
2349 The macros which input a file in LaTeX (like \input, \include) can be
2350 configured in the new option `reftex-include-file-commands'.
2352 RefTeX supports global incremental search.
2355 ** Prolog mode has a new variable `prolog-font-lock-keywords'
2356 to support use of font-lock.
2358 ** HTML/SGML changes:
2361 *** Emacs now tries to set up buffer coding systems for HTML/XML files
2365 *** SGML mode has indentation and supports XML syntax.
2366 The new variable `sgml-xml-mode' tells SGML mode to use XML syntax.
2367 When this option is enabled, SGML tags are inserted in XML style,
2368 i.e., there is always a closing tag.
2369 By default, its setting is inferred on a buffer-by-buffer basis
2370 from the file name or buffer contents.
2373 *** `xml-mode' is now an alias for `sgml-mode', which has XML support.
2378 *** C-c C-c prompts for a command to run, and tries to offer a good default.
2381 *** The user option `tex-start-options-string' has been replaced
2382 by two new user options: `tex-start-options', which should hold
2383 command-line options to feed to TeX, and `tex-start-commands' which should hold
2384 TeX commands to use at startup.
2387 *** verbatim environments are now highlighted in courier by font-lock
2388 and super/sub-scripts are made into super/sub-scripts.
2391 *** New major mode Doctex mode, for *.dtx files.
2395 *** The new command `bibtex-url' browses a URL for the BibTeX entry at
2396 point (bound to C-c C-l and mouse-2, RET on clickable fields).
2398 *** The new command `bibtex-entry-update' (bound to C-c C-u) updates
2399 an existing BibTeX entry.
2401 *** New `bibtex-entry-format' option `required-fields', enabled by default.
2403 *** `bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries' can take values `plain',
2404 `crossref', and `entry-class' which control the sorting scheme used
2405 for BibTeX entries. `bibtex-sort-entry-class' controls the sorting
2406 scheme `entry-class'. TAB completion for reference keys and
2407 automatic detection of duplicates does not require anymore that
2408 `bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries' is non-nil.
2410 *** If the new variable `bibtex-parse-keys-fast' is non-nil,
2411 use fast but simplified algorithm for parsing BibTeX keys.
2413 *** If the new variable `bibtex-autoadd-commas' is non-nil,
2414 automatically add missing commas at end of BibTeX fields.
2416 *** The new variable `bibtex-autofill-types' contains a list of entry
2417 types for which fields are filled automatically (if possible).
2419 *** The new command `bibtex-complete' completes word fragment before
2420 point according to context (bound to M-tab).
2422 *** The new commands `bibtex-find-entry' and `bibtex-find-crossref'
2423 locate entries and crossref'd entries (bound to C-c C-s and C-c C-x).
2424 Crossref fields are clickable (bound to mouse-2, RET).
2426 *** In BibTeX mode the command `fill-paragraph' (M-q) fills
2427 individual fields of a BibTeX entry.
2429 *** The new variables `bibtex-files' and `bibtex-file-path' define a set
2430 of BibTeX files that are searched for entry keys.
2432 *** The new command `bibtex-validate-globally' checks for duplicate keys
2433 in multiple BibTeX files.
2435 *** The new command `bibtex-copy-summary-as-kill' pushes summary
2436 of BibTeX entry to kill ring (bound to C-c C-t).
2439 ** In Enriched mode, `set-left-margin' and `set-right-margin' are now
2440 by default bound to `C-c [' and `C-c ]' instead of the former `C-c C-l'
2446 *** In GUD mode, when talking to GDB, C-x C-a C-j "jumps" the program
2447 counter to the specified source line (the one where point is).
2450 *** GUD mode has its own tool bar for controlling execution of the inferior
2451 and other common debugger commands.
2454 *** The new package gdb-ui.el provides an enhanced graphical interface to
2455 GDB. You can interact with GDB through the GUD buffer in the usual way, but
2456 there are also further buffers which control the execution and describe the
2457 state of your program. It can separate the input/output of your program from
2458 that of GDB and watches expressions in the speedbar. It also uses features of
2459 Emacs 21/22 such as the toolbar, and bitmaps in the fringe to indicate
2462 Use M-x gdb to start GDB-UI.
2464 *** The variable tooltip-gud-tips-p has been removed. GUD tooltips can now be
2465 toggled independently of normal tooltips with the minor mode
2469 *** In graphical mode, with a C program, GUD Tooltips have been extended to
2470 display the #define directive associated with an identifier when program is
2474 ** GUD mode improvements for jdb:
2476 *** Search for source files using jdb classpath and class
2477 information. Fast startup since there is no need to scan all
2478 source files up front. There is also no need to create and maintain
2479 lists of source directories to scan. Look at `gud-jdb-use-classpath'
2480 and `gud-jdb-classpath' customization variables documentation.
2482 *** Supports the standard breakpoint (gud-break, gud-clear)
2483 set/clear operations from java source files under the classpath, stack
2484 traversal (gud-up, gud-down), and run until current stack finish
2487 *** Supports new jdb (Java 1.2 and later) in addition to oldjdb
2490 *** The previous method of searching for source files has been
2491 preserved in case someone still wants/needs to use it.
2492 Set `gud-jdb-use-classpath' to nil.
2494 Added Customization Variables
2496 *** `gud-jdb-command-name'. What command line to use to invoke jdb.
2498 *** `gud-jdb-use-classpath'. Allows selection of java source file searching
2499 method: set to t for new method, nil to scan `gud-jdb-directories' for
2500 java sources (previous method).
2502 *** `gud-jdb-directories'. List of directories to scan and search for java
2503 classes using the original gud-jdb method (if `gud-jdb-use-classpath'
2508 *** The STARTTLS wrapper (starttls.el) can now use GNUTLS
2509 instead of the OpenSSL based `starttls' tool. For backwards
2510 compatibility, it prefers `starttls', but you can toggle
2511 `starttls-use-gnutls' to switch to GNUTLS (or simply remove the
2514 *** Do not allow debugger output history variable to grow without bounds.
2516 ** Auto-Revert changes:
2519 *** You can now use Auto Revert mode to `tail' a file.
2521 If point is at the end of a file buffer before reverting, Auto Revert
2522 mode keeps it at the end after reverting. Similarly if point is
2523 displayed at the end of a file buffer in any window, it stays at
2524 the end of the buffer in that window. This allows to tail a file:
2525 just put point at the end of the buffer and it stays there. This
2526 rule applies to file buffers. For non-file buffers, the behavior can
2529 If you are sure that the file will only change by growing at the end,
2530 then you can tail the file more efficiently by using the new minor
2531 mode Auto Revert Tail mode. The function `auto-revert-tail-mode'
2535 *** Auto Revert mode is now more careful to avoid excessive reverts and
2536 other potential problems when deciding which non-file buffers to
2537 revert. This matters especially if Global Auto Revert mode is enabled
2538 and `global-auto-revert-non-file-buffers' is non-nil. Auto Revert
2539 mode only reverts a non-file buffer if the buffer has a non-nil
2540 `revert-buffer-function' and a non-nil `buffer-stale-function', which
2541 decides whether the buffer should be reverted. Currently, this means
2542 that auto reverting works for Dired buffers (although this may not
2543 work properly on all operating systems) and for the Buffer Menu.
2546 *** If the new user option `auto-revert-check-vc-info' is non-nil, Auto
2547 Revert mode reliably updates version control info (such as the version
2548 control number in the mode line), in all version controlled buffers in
2549 which it is active. If the option is nil, the default, then this info
2550 only gets updated whenever the buffer gets reverted.
2555 The recent file list is now automatically cleanup when recentf mode is
2556 enabled. The new option `recentf-auto-cleanup' controls when to do
2559 The `recentf-keep' option replaces `recentf-keep-non-readable-files-p'
2560 and provides a more general mechanism to customize which file names to
2561 keep in the recent list.
2563 With the more advanced option: `recentf-filename-handler', you can
2564 specify a function that transforms filenames handled by recentf. For
2565 example, if set to `file-truename', the same file will not be in the
2566 recent list with different symbolic links.
2568 To follow naming convention, `recentf-menu-append-commands-flag'
2569 replaces the misnamed option `recentf-menu-append-commands-p'. The
2570 old name remains available as alias, but has been marked obsolete.
2576 *** Desktop saving is now a minor mode, `desktop-save-mode'.
2579 *** The variable `desktop-enable' is obsolete.
2581 Customize `desktop-save-mode' to enable desktop saving.
2584 *** Buffers are saved in the desktop file in the same order as that in the
2588 *** The desktop package can be customized to restore only some buffers
2589 immediately, remaining buffers are restored lazily (when Emacs is
2594 - desktop-revert reverts to the last loaded desktop.
2595 - desktop-change-dir kills current desktop and loads a new.
2596 - desktop-save-in-desktop-dir saves desktop in the directory from which
2598 - desktop-lazy-complete runs the desktop load to completion.
2599 - desktop-lazy-abort aborts lazy loading of the desktop.
2602 *** New customizable variables:
2603 - desktop-save. Determins whether the desktop should be saved when it is
2605 - desktop-file-name-format. Format in which desktop file names should be saved.
2606 - desktop-path. List of directories in which to lookup the desktop file.
2607 - desktop-locals-to-save. List of local variables to save.
2608 - desktop-globals-to-clear. List of global variables that `desktop-clear' will clear.
2609 - desktop-clear-preserve-buffers-regexp. Regexp identifying buffers that `desktop-clear'
2611 - desktop-restore-eager. Number of buffers to restore immediately. Remaining buffers are
2612 restored lazily (when Emacs is idle).
2613 - desktop-lazy-verbose. Verbose reporting of lazily created buffers.
2614 - desktop-lazy-idle-delay. Idle delay before starting to create buffers.
2617 *** New command line option --no-desktop
2621 - desktop-after-read-hook run after a desktop is loaded.
2622 - desktop-no-desktop-file-hook run when no desktop file is found.
2625 ** The saveplace.el package now filters out unreadable files.
2627 When you exit Emacs, the saved positions in visited files no longer
2628 include files that aren't readable, e.g. files that don't exist.
2629 Customize the new option `save-place-forget-unreadable-files' to nil
2630 to get the old behavior. The new options `save-place-save-skipped'
2631 and `save-place-skip-check-regexp' allow further fine-tuning of this
2637 *** When comparing directories.
2638 Typing D brings up a buffer that lists the differences between the contents of
2639 directories. Now it is possible to use this buffer to copy the missing files
2640 from one directory to another.
2643 *** When comparing files or buffers.
2644 Typing the = key now offers to perform the word-by-word comparison of the
2645 currently highlighted regions in an inferior Ediff session. If you answer 'n'
2646 then it reverts to the old behavior and asks the user to select regions for
2650 *** The new command `ediff-backup' compares a file with its most recent
2651 backup using `ediff'. If you specify the name of a backup file,
2652 `ediff-backup' compares it with the file of which it is a backup.
2657 *** New regular expressions features
2659 **** New syntax for regular expressions, multi-line regular expressions.
2661 The syntax --ignore-case-regexp=/regex/ is now undocumented and retained
2662 only for backward compatibility. The new equivalent syntax is
2663 --regex=/regex/i. More generally, it is --regex=/TAGREGEX/TAGNAME/MODS,
2664 where `/TAGNAME' is optional, as usual, and MODS is a string of 0 or
2665 more characters among `i' (ignore case), `m' (multi-line) and `s'
2666 (single-line). The `m' and `s' modifiers behave as in Perl regular
2667 expressions: `m' allows regexps to match more than one line, while `s'
2668 (which implies `m') means that `.' matches newlines. The ability to
2669 span newlines allows writing of much more powerful regular expressions
2670 and rapid prototyping for tagging new languages.
2672 **** Regular expressions can use char escape sequences as in GCC.
2674 The escaped character sequence \a, \b, \d, \e, \f, \n, \r, \t, \v,
2675 respectively, stand for the ASCII characters BEL, BS, DEL, ESC, FF, NL,
2678 **** Regular expressions can be bound to a given language.
2680 The syntax --regex={LANGUAGE}REGEX means that REGEX is used to make tags
2681 only for files of language LANGUAGE, and ignored otherwise. This is
2682 particularly useful when storing regexps in a file.
2684 **** Regular expressions can be read from a file.
2686 The --regex=@regexfile option means read the regexps from a file, one
2687 per line. Lines beginning with space or tab are ignored.
2689 *** New language parsing features
2691 **** The `::' qualifier triggers C++ parsing in C file.
2693 Previously, only the `template' and `class' keywords had this effect.
2695 **** The GCC __attribute__ keyword is now recognized and ignored.
2697 **** New language HTML.
2699 Tags are generated for `title' as well as `h1', `h2', and `h3'. Also,
2700 when `name=' is used inside an anchor and whenever `id=' is used.
2702 **** In Makefiles, constants are tagged.
2704 If you want the old behavior instead, thus avoiding to increase the
2705 size of the tags file, use the --no-globals option.
2707 **** New language Lua.
2709 All functions are tagged.
2711 **** In Perl, packages are tags.
2713 Subroutine tags are named from their package. You can jump to sub tags
2714 as you did before, by the sub name, or additionally by looking for
2717 **** In Prolog, etags creates tags for rules in addition to predicates.
2719 **** New language PHP.
2721 Functions, classes and defines are tags. If the --members option is
2722 specified to etags, variables are tags also.
2724 **** New default keywords for TeX.
2726 The new keywords are def, newcommand, renewcommand, newenvironment and
2729 *** Honour #line directives.
2731 When Etags parses an input file that contains C preprocessor's #line
2732 directives, it creates tags using the file name and line number
2733 specified in those directives. This is useful when dealing with code
2734 created from Cweb source files. When Etags tags the generated file, it
2735 writes tags pointing to the source file.
2737 *** New option --parse-stdin=FILE.
2739 This option is mostly useful when calling etags from programs. It can
2740 be used (only once) in place of a file name on the command line. Etags
2741 reads from standard input and marks the produced tags as belonging to
2747 *** The key C-x C-q only changes the read-only state of the buffer
2748 (toggle-read-only). It no longer checks files in or out.
2750 We made this change because we held a poll and found that many users
2751 were unhappy with the previous behavior. If you do prefer this
2752 behavior, you can bind `vc-toggle-read-only' to C-x C-q in your
2755 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-q" 'vc-toggle-read-only)
2757 The function `vc-toggle-read-only' will continue to exist.
2760 *** The new variable `vc-cvs-global-switches' specifies switches that
2761 are passed to any CVS command invoked by VC.
2763 These switches are used as "global options" for CVS, which means they
2764 are inserted before the command name. For example, this allows you to
2765 specify a compression level using the `-z#' option for CVS.
2768 *** New backends for Subversion and Meta-CVS.
2771 *** VC-Annotate mode enhancements
2773 In VC-Annotate mode, you can now use the following key bindings for
2774 enhanced functionality to browse the annotations of past revisions, or
2775 to view diffs or log entries directly from vc-annotate-mode:
2777 P: annotates the previous revision
2778 N: annotates the next revision
2779 J: annotates the revision at line
2780 A: annotates the revision previous to line
2781 D: shows the diff of the revision at line with its previous revision
2782 L: shows the log of the revision at line
2783 W: annotates the workfile (most up to date) version
2788 *** In pcl-cvs mode, there is a new `d y' command to view the diffs
2789 between the local version of the file and yesterday's head revision
2793 *** In pcl-cvs mode, there is a new `d r' command to view the changes
2794 anyone has committed to the repository since you last executed
2795 `checkout', `update' or `commit'. That means using cvs diff options
2799 ** The new variable `mail-default-directory' specifies
2800 `default-directory' for mail buffers. This directory is used for
2801 auto-save files of mail buffers. It defaults to "~/".
2804 ** The mode line can indicate new mail in a directory or file.
2806 See the documentation of the user option
2807 `display-time-mail-directory'.
2812 *** Rmail now displays 5-digit message ids in its summary buffer.
2814 *** The new commands rmail-end-of-message and rmail-summary end-of-message,
2815 by default bound to `/', go to the end of the current mail message in
2816 Rmail and Rmail summary buffers.
2819 *** Support for `movemail' from GNU mailutils was added to Rmail.
2821 This version of `movemail' allows to read mail from a wide range of
2822 mailbox formats, including remote POP3 and IMAP4 mailboxes with or
2823 without TLS encryption. If GNU mailutils is installed on the system
2824 and its version of `movemail' can be found in exec-path, it will be
2825 used instead of the native one.
2830 *** Gnus now includes Sieve and PGG
2832 Sieve is a library for managing Sieve scripts. PGG is a library to handle
2836 *** There are many news features, bug fixes and improvements.
2838 See the file GNUS-NEWS or the node "Oort Gnus" in the Gnus manual for details.
2843 Upgraded to MH-E version 7.84. There have been major changes since
2844 version 5.0.2; see MH-E-NEWS for details.
2846 ** Calendar changes:
2849 *** You can now use < and >, instead of C-x < and C-x >, to scroll
2850 the calendar left or right. (The old key bindings still work too.)
2853 *** There is a new calendar package, icalendar.el, that can be used to
2854 convert Emacs diary entries to/from the iCalendar format.
2857 *** Diary sexp entries can have custom marking in the calendar.
2858 Diary sexp functions which only apply to certain days (such as
2859 `diary-block' or `diary-cyclic') now take an optional parameter MARK,
2860 which is the name of a face or a single-character string indicating
2861 how to highlight the day in the calendar display. Specifying a
2862 single-character string as @var{mark} places the character next to the
2863 day in the calendar. Specifying a face highlights the day with that
2864 face. This lets you have different colors or markings for vacations,
2865 appointments, paydays or anything else using a sexp.
2868 *** The new function `calendar-goto-day-of-year' (g D) prompts for a
2869 year and day number, and moves to that date. Negative day numbers
2870 count backward from the end of the year.
2873 *** The new Calendar function `calendar-goto-iso-week' (g w)
2874 prompts for a year and a week number, and moves to the first
2875 day of that ISO week.
2878 *** The new variable `calendar-minimum-window-height' affects the
2879 window generated by the function `generate-calendar-window'.
2882 *** The functions `holiday-easter-etc' and `holiday-advent' now take
2883 optional arguments, in order to only report on the specified holiday
2884 rather than all. This makes customization of variables such as
2885 `christian-holidays' simpler.
2888 *** The function `simple-diary-display' now by default sets a header line.
2889 This can be controlled through the variables `diary-header-line-flag'
2890 and `diary-header-line-format'.
2893 *** The procedure for activating appointment reminders has changed:
2894 use the new function `appt-activate'. The new variable
2895 `appt-display-format' controls how reminders are displayed, replacing
2896 `appt-issue-message', `appt-visible', and `appt-msg-window'.
2899 *** The new functions `diary-from-outlook', `diary-from-outlook-gnus',
2900 and `diary-from-outlook-rmail' can be used to import diary entries
2901 from Outlook-format appointments in mail messages. The variable
2902 `diary-outlook-formats' can be customized to recognize additional
2908 *** The variable `sql-product' controls the highlightng of different
2909 SQL dialects. This variable can be set globally via Customize, on a
2910 buffer-specific basis via local variable settings, or for the current
2911 session using the new SQL->Product submenu. (This menu replaces the
2912 SQL->Highlighting submenu.)
2914 The following values are supported:
2916 ansi ANSI Standard (default)
2930 The current product name will be shown on the mode line following the
2933 The technique of setting `sql-mode-font-lock-defaults' directly in
2934 your `.emacs' will no longer establish the default highlighting -- Use
2935 `sql-product' to accomplish this.
2937 ANSI keywords are always highlighted.
2939 *** The function `sql-add-product-keywords' can be used to add
2940 font-lock rules to the product specific rules. For example, to have
2941 all identifiers ending in `_t' under MS SQLServer treated as a type,
2942 you would use the following line in your .emacs file:
2944 (sql-add-product-keywords 'ms
2945 '(("\\<\\w+_t\\>" . font-lock-type-face)))
2947 *** Oracle support includes keyword highlighting for Oracle 9i.
2949 Most SQL and PL/SQL keywords are implemented. SQL*Plus commands are
2950 highlighted in `font-lock-doc-face'.
2952 *** Microsoft SQLServer support has been significantly improved.
2954 Keyword highlighting for SqlServer 2000 is implemented.
2955 sql-interactive-mode defaults to use osql, rather than isql, because
2956 osql flushes its error stream more frequently. Thus error messages
2957 are displayed when they occur rather than when the session is
2960 If the username and password are not provided to `sql-ms', osql is
2961 called with the `-E' command line argument to use the operating system
2962 credentials to authenticate the user.
2964 *** Postgres support is enhanced.
2965 Keyword highlighting of Postgres 7.3 is implemented. Prompting for
2966 the username and the pgsql `-U' option is added.
2968 *** MySQL support is enhanced.
2969 Keyword higlighting of MySql 4.0 is implemented.
2971 *** Imenu support has been enhanced to locate tables, views, indexes,
2972 packages, procedures, functions, triggers, sequences, rules, and
2975 *** Added SQL->Start SQLi Session menu entry which calls the
2976 appropriate `sql-interactive-mode' wrapper for the current setting of
2980 *** sql.el supports the SQLite interpreter--call 'sql-sqlite'.
2985 *** New ffap commands and keybindings:
2987 C-x C-r (`ffap-read-only'),
2988 C-x C-v (`ffap-alternate-file'), C-x C-d (`ffap-list-directory'),
2989 C-x 4 r (`ffap-read-only-other-window'), C-x 4 d (`ffap-dired-other-window'),
2990 C-x 5 r (`ffap-read-only-other-frame'), C-x 5 d (`ffap-dired-other-frame').
2993 *** FFAP accepts wildcards in a file name by default.
2995 C-x C-f passes the file name to `find-file' with non-nil WILDCARDS
2996 argument, which visits multiple files, and C-x d passes it to `dired'.
2999 ** In skeleton.el, `-' marks the `skeleton-point' without interregion interaction.
3001 `@' has reverted to only setting `skeleton-positions' and no longer
3002 sets `skeleton-point'. Skeletons which used @ to mark
3003 `skeleton-point' independent of `_' should now use `-' instead. The
3004 updated `skeleton-insert' docstring explains these new features along
3005 with other details of skeleton construction.
3008 ** Hideshow mode changes
3010 *** New variable `hs-set-up-overlay' allows customization of the overlay
3011 used to effect hiding for hideshow minor mode. Integration with isearch
3012 handles the overlay property `display' specially, preserving it during
3013 temporary overlay showing in the course of an isearch operation.
3015 *** New variable `hs-allow-nesting' non-nil means that hiding a block does
3016 not discard the hidden state of any "internal" blocks; when the parent
3017 block is later shown, the internal blocks remain hidden. Default is nil.
3020 ** `hide-ifdef-mode' now uses overlays rather than selective-display
3021 to hide its text. This should be mostly transparent but slightly
3022 changes the behavior of motion commands like C-e and C-p.
3025 ** `partial-completion-mode' now handles partial completion on directory names.
3028 ** The type-break package now allows `type-break-file-name' to be nil
3029 and if so, doesn't store any data across sessions. This is handy if
3030 you don't want the `.type-break' file in your home directory or are
3031 annoyed by the need for interaction when you kill Emacs.
3034 ** `ps-print' can now print characters from the mule-unicode charsets.
3036 Printing text with characters from the mule-unicode-* sets works with
3037 `ps-print', provided that you have installed the appropriate BDF
3038 fonts. See the file INSTALL for URLs where you can find these fonts.
3041 ** New command `strokes-global-set-stroke-string'.
3042 This is like `strokes-global-set-stroke', but it allows you to bind
3043 the stroke directly to a string to insert. This is convenient for
3044 using strokes as an input method.
3046 ** Emacs server changes:
3049 *** You can have several Emacs servers on the same machine.
3051 % emacs --eval '(setq server-name "foo")' -f server-start &
3052 % emacs --eval '(setq server-name "bar")' -f server-start &
3053 % emacsclient -s foo file1
3054 % emacsclient -s bar file2
3057 *** The `emacsclient' command understands the options `--eval' and
3058 `--display' which tell Emacs respectively to evaluate the given Lisp
3059 expression and to use the given display when visiting files.
3062 *** User option `server-mode' can be used to start a server process.
3065 ** LDAP support now defaults to ldapsearch from OpenLDAP version 2.
3068 ** You can now disable pc-selection-mode after enabling it.
3070 M-x pc-selection-mode behaves like a proper minor mode, and with no
3071 argument it toggles the mode. Turning off PC-Selection mode restores
3072 the global key bindings that were replaced by turning on the mode.
3075 ** `uniquify-strip-common-suffix' tells uniquify to prefer
3076 `file|dir1' and `file|dir2' to `file|dir1/subdir' and `file|dir2/subdir'.
3079 ** Support for `magic cookie' standout modes has been removed.
3081 Emacs still works on terminals that require magic cookies in order to
3082 use standout mode, but they can no longer display mode-lines in
3086 ** The game `mpuz' is enhanced.
3088 `mpuz' now allows the 2nd factor not to have two identical digits. By
3089 default, all trivial operations involving whole lines are performed
3090 automatically. The game uses faces for better visual feedback.
3092 ** battery.el changes:
3095 *** display-battery-mode replaces display-battery.
3098 *** battery.el now works on recent versions of OS X.
3101 ** calculator.el now has radix grouping mode.
3103 To enable this, set `calculator-output-radix' non-nil. In this mode a
3104 separator character is used every few digits, making it easier to see
3105 byte boundries etc. For more info, see the documentation of the
3106 variable `calculator-radix-grouping-mode'.
3109 ** fast-lock.el and lazy-lock.el are obsolete. Use jit-lock.el instead.
3112 ** iso-acc.el is now obsolete. Use one of the latin input methods instead.
3115 ** cplus-md.el has been deleted.
3117 * Changes in Emacs 22.1 on non-free operating systems
3120 ** The HOME directory defaults to Application Data under the user profile.
3122 If you used a previous version of Emacs without setting the HOME
3123 environment variable and a `.emacs' was saved, then Emacs will continue
3124 using C:/ as the default HOME. But if you are installing Emacs afresh,
3125 the default location will be the "Application Data" (or similar
3126 localized name) subdirectory of your user profile. A typical location
3127 of this directory is "C:\Documents and Settings\USERNAME\Application Data",
3128 where USERNAME is your user name.
3130 This change means that users can now have their own `.emacs' files on
3131 shared computers, and the default HOME directory is less likely to be
3132 read-only on computers that are administered by someone else.
3135 ** Passing resources on the command line now works on MS Windows.
3137 You can use --xrm to pass resource settings to Emacs, overriding any
3138 existing values. For example:
3140 emacs --xrm "Emacs.Background:red" --xrm "Emacs.Geometry:100x20"
3142 will start up Emacs on an initial frame of 100x20 with red background,
3143 irrespective of geometry or background setting on the Windows registry.
3146 ** On MS Windows, the "system caret" now follows the cursor.
3148 This enables Emacs to work better with programs that need to track
3149 the cursor, for example screen magnifiers and text to speech programs.
3152 ** Tooltips now work on MS Windows.
3154 See the Emacs 21.1 NEWS entry for tooltips for details.
3157 ** Images are now supported on MS Windows.
3159 PBM and XBM images are supported out of the box. Other image formats
3160 depend on external libraries. All of these libraries have been ported
3161 to Windows, and can be found in both source and binary form at
3162 http://gnuwin32.sourceforge.net/. Note that libpng also depends on
3163 zlib, and tiff depends on the version of jpeg that it was compiled
3164 against. For additional information, see nt/INSTALL.
3167 ** Sound is now supported on MS Windows.
3169 WAV format is supported on all versions of Windows, other formats such
3170 as AU, AIFF and MP3 may be supported in the more recent versions of
3171 Windows, or when other software provides hooks into the system level
3172 sound support for those formats.
3175 ** Different shaped mouse pointers are supported on MS Windows.
3177 The mouse pointer changes shape depending on what is under the pointer.
3180 ** Pointing devices with more than 3 buttons are now supported on MS Windows.
3182 The new variable `w32-pass-extra-mouse-buttons-to-system' controls
3183 whether Emacs should handle the extra buttons itself (the default), or
3184 pass them to Windows to be handled with system-wide functions.
3187 ** Emacs takes note of colors defined in Control Panel on MS-Windows.
3189 The Control Panel defines some default colors for applications in much
3190 the same way as wildcard X Resources do on X. Emacs now adds these
3191 colors to the colormap prefixed by System (eg SystemMenu for the
3192 default Menu background, SystemMenuText for the foreground), and uses
3193 some of them to initialize some of the default faces.
3194 `list-colors-display' shows the list of System color names, in case
3195 you wish to use them in other faces.
3198 ** On MS Windows NT/W2K/XP, Emacs uses Unicode for clipboard operations.
3200 Those systems use Unicode internally, so this allows Emacs to share
3201 multilingual text with other applications. On other versions of
3202 MS Windows, Emacs now uses the appropriate locale coding-system, so
3203 the clipboard should work correctly for your local language without
3207 ** Running in a console window in Windows now uses the console size.
3209 Previous versions of Emacs erred on the side of having a usable Emacs
3210 through telnet, even though that was inconvenient if you use Emacs in
3211 a local console window with a scrollback buffer. The default value of
3212 w32-use-full-screen-buffer is now nil, which favours local console
3213 windows. Recent versions of Windows telnet also work well with this
3214 setting. If you are using an older telnet server then Emacs detects
3215 that the console window dimensions that are reported are not sane, and
3216 defaults to 80x25. If you use such a telnet server regularly at a size
3217 other than 80x25, you can still manually set
3218 w32-use-full-screen-buffer to t.
3221 ** On Mac OS, `keyboard-coding-system' changes based on the keyboard script.
3224 ** The variable `mac-keyboard-text-encoding' and the constants
3225 `kTextEncodingMacRoman', `kTextEncodingISOLatin1', and
3226 `kTextEncodingISOLatin2' are obsolete.
3228 * Incompatible Lisp Changes in Emacs 22.1
3231 ** The variables post-command-idle-hook and post-command-idle-delay have
3232 been removed. Use run-with-idle-timer instead.
3235 ** `suppress-keymap' now works by remapping `self-insert-command' to
3236 the command `undefined'. (In earlier Emacs versions, it used
3237 `substitute-key-definition' to rebind self inserting characters to
3241 ** Mode line display ignores text properties as well as the
3242 :propertize and :eval forms in the value of a variable whose
3243 `risky-local-variable' property is nil.
3246 ** Support for Mocklisp has been removed.
3248 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 22.1
3250 ** General Lisp changes:
3252 *** The function `expt' handles negative exponents differently.
3253 The value for `(expt A B)', if both A and B are integers and B is
3254 negative, is now a float. For example: (expt 2 -2) => 0.25.
3257 *** The function `eql' is now available without requiring the CL package.
3260 *** `makehash' is now obsolete. Use `make-hash-table' instead.
3263 *** `add-to-list' takes an optional third argument, APPEND.
3265 If APPEND is non-nil, the new element gets added at the end of the
3266 list instead of at the beginning. This change actually occurred in
3267 Emacs 21.1, but was not documented then.
3270 *** New function `add-to-ordered-list' is like `add-to-list' but
3271 associates a numeric ordering of each element added to the list.
3274 *** New function `copy-tree' makes a copy of a tree.
3276 It recursively copyies through both CARs and CDRs.
3279 *** New function `delete-dups' deletes `equal' duplicate elements from a list.
3281 It modifies the list destructively, like `delete'. Of several `equal'
3282 occurrences of an element in the list, the one that's kept is the
3286 *** New function `rassq-delete-all'.
3288 (rassq-delete-all VALUE ALIST) deletes, from ALIST, each element whose
3289 CDR is `eq' to the specified value.
3292 *** The function `number-sequence' makes a list of equally-separated numbers.
3294 For instance, (number-sequence 4 9) returns (4 5 6 7 8 9). By
3295 default, the separation is 1, but you can specify a different
3296 separation as the third argument. (number-sequence 1.5 6 2) returns
3300 *** New variables `most-positive-fixnum' and `most-negative-fixnum'.
3302 They hold the largest and smallest possible integer values.
3305 *** Minor change in the function `format'.
3307 Some flags that were accepted but not implemented (such as "*") are no
3311 *** Functions `get' and `plist-get' no longer give errors for bad plists.
3313 They return nil for a malformed property list or if the list is
3317 *** New functions `lax-plist-get' and `lax-plist-put'.
3319 They are like `plist-get' and `plist-put', except that they compare
3320 the property name using `equal' rather than `eq'.
3323 *** New variable `print-continuous-numbering'.
3325 When this is non-nil, successive calls to print functions use a single
3326 numbering scheme for circular structure references. This is only
3327 relevant when `print-circle' is non-nil.
3329 When you bind `print-continuous-numbering' to t, you should
3330 also bind `print-number-table' to nil.
3333 *** New function `macroexpand-all' expands all macros in a form.
3335 It is similar to the Common-Lisp function of the same name.
3336 One difference is that it guarantees to return the original argument
3337 if no expansion is done, which can be tested using `eq'.
3340 *** The function `atan' now accepts an optional second argument.
3342 When called with 2 arguments, as in `(atan Y X)', `atan' returns the
3343 angle in radians between the vector [X, Y] and the X axis. (This is
3344 equivalent to the standard C library function `atan2'.)
3347 *** A function or macro's doc string can now specify the calling pattern.
3349 You put this info in the doc string's last line. It should be
3350 formatted so as to match the regexp "\n\n(fn .*)\\'". If you don't
3351 specify this explicitly, Emacs determines it from the actual argument
3352 names. Usually that default is right, but not always.
3355 *** New macro `with-local-quit' temporarily allows quitting.
3357 A quit inside the body of `with-local-quit' is caught by the
3358 `with-local-quit' form itself, but another quit will happen later once
3359 the code that has inhibitted quitting exits.
3361 This is for use around potentially blocking or long-running code
3362 inside timer functions and `post-command-hook' functions.
3365 *** New macro `define-obsolete-function-alias'.
3367 This combines `defalias' and `make-obsolete'.
3370 *** New function `unsafep' determines whether a Lisp form is safe.
3372 It returns nil if the given Lisp form can't possibly do anything
3373 dangerous; otherwise it returns a reason why the form might be unsafe
3374 (calls unknown function, alters global variable, etc).
3376 *** `list-faces-display' takes an optional argument, REGEXP.
3378 If it is non-nil, the function lists only faces matching this regexp.
3380 ** Lisp code indentation features:
3383 *** The `defmacro' form can contain indentation and edebug declarations.
3385 These declarations specify how to indent the macro calls in Lisp mode
3386 and how to debug them with Edebug. You write them like this:
3388 (defmacro NAME LAMBDA-LIST [DOC-STRING] [DECLARATION ...] ...)
3390 DECLARATION is a list `(declare DECLARATION-SPECIFIER ...)'. The
3391 possible declaration specifiers are:
3394 Set NAME's `lisp-indent-function' property to INDENT.
3397 Set NAME's `edebug-form-spec' property to DEBUG. (This is
3398 equivalent to writing a `def-edebug-spec' for the macro,
3399 but this is cleaner.)
3402 *** cl-indent now allows customization of Indentation of backquoted forms.
3404 See the new user option `lisp-backquote-indentation'.
3407 *** cl-indent now handles indentation of simple and extended `loop' forms.
3409 The new user options `lisp-loop-keyword-indentation',
3410 `lisp-loop-forms-indentation', and `lisp-simple-loop-indentation' can
3411 be used to customize the indentation of keywords and forms in loop
3415 ** Variable aliases:
3417 *** New function: defvaralias ALIAS-VAR BASE-VAR [DOCSTRING]
3419 This function defines the symbol ALIAS-VAR as a variable alias for
3420 symbol BASE-VAR. This means that retrieving the value of ALIAS-VAR
3421 returns the value of BASE-VAR, and changing the value of ALIAS-VAR
3422 changes the value of BASE-VAR.
3424 DOCSTRING, if present, is the documentation for ALIAS-VAR; else it has
3425 the same documentation as BASE-VAR.
3427 *** New function: indirect-variable VARIABLE
3429 This function returns the variable at the end of the chain of aliases
3430 of VARIABLE. If VARIABLE is not a symbol, or if VARIABLE is not
3431 defined as an alias, the function returns VARIABLE.
3433 It might be noteworthy that variables aliases work for all kinds of
3434 variables, including buffer-local and frame-local variables.
3437 *** The macro `define-obsolete-variable-alias' combines `defvaralias' and
3438 `make-obsolete-variable'.
3440 ** defcustom changes:
3443 *** The new customization type `float' requires a floating point number.
3448 *** The escape sequence \s is now interpreted as a SPACE character.
3450 Exception: In a character constant, if it is followed by a `-' in a
3451 character constant (e.g. ?\s-A), it is still interpreted as the super
3452 modifier. In strings, \s is always interpreted as a space.
3455 *** A hex escape in a string constant forces the string to be multibyte.
3458 *** An octal escape in a string constant forces the string to be unibyte.
3461 *** `split-string' now includes null substrings in the returned list if
3462 the optional argument SEPARATORS is non-nil and there are matches for
3463 SEPARATORS at the beginning or end of the string. If SEPARATORS is
3464 nil, or if the new optional third argument OMIT-NULLS is non-nil, all
3465 empty matches are omitted from the returned list.
3468 *** New function `string-to-multibyte' converts a unibyte string to a
3469 multibyte string with the same individual character codes.
3472 *** New function `substring-no-properties' returns a substring without
3476 *** The new function `assoc-string' replaces `assoc-ignore-case' and
3477 `assoc-ignore-representation', which are still available, but have
3478 been declared obsolete.
3481 ** Displaying warnings to the user.
3483 See the functions `warn' and `display-warning', or the Lisp Manual.
3484 If you want to be sure the warning will not be overlooked, this
3485 facility is much better than using `message', since it displays
3486 warnings in a separate window.
3489 ** Progress reporters.
3491 These provide a simple and uniform way for commands to present
3492 progress messages for the user.
3494 See the new functions `make-progress-reporter',
3495 `progress-reporter-update', `progress-reporter-force-update',
3496 `progress-reporter-done', and `dotimes-with-progress-reporter'.
3498 ** Buffer positions:
3501 *** Function `compute-motion' now calculates the usable window
3502 width if the WIDTH argument is nil. If the TOPOS argument is nil,
3503 the usable window height and width is used.
3506 *** The `line-move', `scroll-up', and `scroll-down' functions will now
3507 modify the window vscroll to scroll through display rows that are
3508 taller that the height of the window, for example in the presence of
3509 large images. To disable this feature, bind the new variable
3510 `auto-window-vscroll' to nil.
3513 *** The argument to `forward-word', `backward-word' is optional.
3518 *** Argument to `forward-to-indentation' and `backward-to-indentation' is optional.
3523 *** New function `mouse-on-link-p' test if a position is in a clickable link.
3525 This is the function used by the new `mouse-1-click-follows-link'
3529 *** New function `line-number-at-pos' returns the line number of a position.
3531 It an optional buffer position argument that defaults to point.
3534 *** `field-beginning' and `field-end' take new optional argument, LIMIT.
3536 This argument tells them not to search beyond LIMIT. Instead they
3537 give up and return LIMIT.
3540 *** Function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now returns the pixel coordinates
3541 and partial visiblity state of the corresponding row, if the PARTIALLY
3545 *** New functions `posn-at-point' and `posn-at-x-y' return
3546 click-event-style position information for a given visible buffer
3547 position or for a given window pixel coordinate.
3549 ** Text modification:
3552 *** The new function `insert-for-yank' normally works like `insert', but
3553 removes the text properties in the `yank-excluded-properties' list
3554 and handles the `yank-handler' text property.
3557 *** The new function `insert-buffer-substring-as-yank' is like
3558 `insert-for-yank' except that it gets the text from another buffer as
3559 in `insert-buffer-substring'.
3562 *** The new function `insert-buffer-substring-no-properties' is like
3563 `insert-buffer-substring', but removes all text properties from the
3567 *** The new function `filter-buffer-substring' extracts a buffer
3568 substring, passes it through a set of filter functions, and returns
3569 the filtered substring. Use it instead of `buffer-substring' or
3570 `delete-and-extract-region' when copying text into a user-accessible
3571 data structure, such as the kill-ring, X clipboard, or a register.
3573 The list of filter function is specified by the new variable
3574 `buffer-substring-filters'. For example, Longlines mode adds to
3575 `buffer-substring-filters' to remove soft newlines from the copied
3579 *** Function `translate-region' accepts also a char-table as TABLE
3583 *** The new translation table `translation-table-for-input'
3584 is used for customizing self-insertion. The character to
3585 be inserted is translated through it.
3590 The new function `text-clone-create'. Text clones are chunks of text
3591 that are kept identical by transparently propagating changes from one
3595 *** The function `insert-string' is now obsolete.
3600 *** In determining an adaptive fill prefix, Emacs now tries the function in
3601 `adaptive-fill-function' _before_ matching the buffer line against
3602 `adaptive-fill-regexp' rather than _after_ it.
3605 ** Atomic change groups.
3607 To perform some changes in the current buffer "atomically" so that
3608 they either all succeed or are all undone, use `atomic-change-group'
3609 around the code that makes changes. For instance:
3611 (atomic-change-group
3613 (delete-region x y))
3615 If an error (or other nonlocal exit) occurs inside the body of
3616 `atomic-change-group', it unmakes all the changes in that buffer that
3617 were during the execution of the body. The change group has no effect
3618 on any other buffers--any such changes remain.
3620 If you need something more sophisticated, you can directly call the
3621 lower-level functions that `atomic-change-group' uses. Here is how.
3623 To set up a change group for one buffer, call `prepare-change-group'.
3624 Specify the buffer as argument; it defaults to the current buffer.
3625 This function returns a "handle" for the change group. You must save
3626 the handle to activate the change group and then finish it.
3628 Before you change the buffer again, you must activate the change
3629 group. Pass the handle to `activate-change-group' afterward to
3632 After you make the changes, you must finish the change group. You can
3633 either accept the changes or cancel them all. Call
3634 `accept-change-group' to accept the changes in the group as final;
3635 call `cancel-change-group' to undo them all.
3637 You should use `unwind-protect' to make sure the group is always
3638 finished. The call to `activate-change-group' should be inside the
3639 `unwind-protect', in case the user types C-g just after it runs.
3640 (This is one reason why `prepare-change-group' and
3641 `activate-change-group' are separate functions.) Once you finish the
3642 group, don't use the handle again--don't try to finish the same group
3645 To make a multibuffer change group, call `prepare-change-group' once
3646 for each buffer you want to cover, then use `nconc' to combine the
3647 returned values, like this:
3649 (nconc (prepare-change-group buffer-1)
3650 (prepare-change-group buffer-2))
3652 You can then activate the multibuffer change group with a single call
3653 to `activate-change-group', and finish it with a single call to
3654 `accept-change-group' or `cancel-change-group'.
3656 Nested use of several change groups for the same buffer works as you
3657 would expect. Non-nested use of change groups for the same buffer
3658 will lead to undesirable results, so don't let it happen; the first
3659 change group you start for any given buffer should be the last one
3662 ** Buffer-related changes:
3665 *** `list-buffers-noselect' now takes an additional argument, BUFFER-LIST.
3667 If it is non-nil, it specifies which buffers to list.
3670 *** `kill-buffer-hook' is now a permanent local.
3673 *** The new function `buffer-local-value' returns the buffer-local
3674 binding of VARIABLE (a symbol) in buffer BUFFER. If VARIABLE does not
3675 have a buffer-local binding in buffer BUFFER, it returns the default
3676 value of VARIABLE instead.
3678 *** The function `frame-or-buffer-changed-p' now lets you maintain
3679 various status records in parallel.
3681 It take a variable (a symbol) as argument. If the variable is non-nil,
3682 then its value should be a vector installed previously by
3683 `frame-or-buffer-changed-p'. If the frame names, buffer names, buffer
3684 order, or their read-only or modified flags have changed, since the
3685 time the vector's contents were recorded by a previous call to
3686 `frame-or-buffer-changed-p', then the function returns t. Otherwise
3689 On the first call to `frame-or-buffer-changed-p', the variable's
3690 value should be nil. `frame-or-buffer-changed-p' stores a suitable
3691 vector into the variable and returns t.
3693 If the variable is itself nil, then `frame-or-buffer-changed-p' uses,
3694 for compatibility, an internal variable which exists only for this
3697 ** Local variables lists:
3700 *** Text properties in local variables.
3702 A file local variables list cannot specify a string with text
3703 properties--any specified text properties are discarded.
3706 *** The variable `safe-local-eval-forms' specifies a list of forms that
3707 are ok to evaluate when they appear in an `eval' local variables
3708 specification. Normally Emacs asks for confirmation before evaluating
3709 such a form, but if the form appears in this list, no confirmation is
3713 *** If a function has a non-nil `safe-local-eval-function' property,
3714 that means it is ok to evaluate some calls to that function when it
3715 appears in an `eval' local variables specification. If the property
3716 is t, then any form calling that function with constant arguments is
3717 ok. If the property is a function or list of functions, they are called
3718 with the form as argument, and if any returns t, the form is ok to call.
3720 If the form is not "ok to call", that means Emacs asks for
3721 confirmation as before.
3723 ** Searching and matching changes:
3726 *** New function `looking-back' checks whether a regular expression matches
3727 the text before point. Specifying the LIMIT argument bounds how far
3728 back the match can start; this is a way to keep it from taking too long.
3731 *** The new variable `search-spaces-regexp' controls how to search
3732 for spaces in a regular expression. If it is non-nil, it should be a
3733 regular expression, and any series of spaces stands for that regular
3734 expression. If it is nil, spaces stand for themselves.
3736 Spaces inside of constructs such as `[..]' and inside loops such as
3737 `*', `+', and `?' are never replaced with `search-spaces-regexp'.
3740 *** New regular expression operators, `\_<' and `\_>'.
3742 These match the beginning and end of a symbol. A symbol is a
3743 non-empty sequence of either word or symbol constituent characters, as
3744 specified by the syntax table.
3747 *** rx.el has new corresponding `symbol-end' and `symbol-start' elements.
3750 *** `skip-chars-forward' and `skip-chars-backward' now handle
3751 character classes such as `[:alpha:]', along with individual
3752 characters and ranges.
3755 *** In `replace-match', the replacement text no longer inherits
3756 properties from surrounding text.
3759 *** The list returned by `(match-data t)' now has the buffer as a final
3760 element, if the last match was on a buffer. `set-match-data'
3761 accepts such a list for restoring the match state.
3764 *** Functions `match-data' and `set-match-data' now have an optional
3765 argument `reseat'. When non-nil, all markers in the match data list
3766 passed to these function will be reseated to point to nowhere.
3769 *** The default value of `sentence-end' is now defined using the new
3770 variable `sentence-end-without-space', which contains such characters
3771 that end a sentence without following spaces.
3773 The function `sentence-end' should be used to obtain the value of the
3774 variable `sentence-end'. If the variable `sentence-end' is nil, then
3775 this function returns the regexp constructed from the variables
3776 `sentence-end-without-period', `sentence-end-double-space' and
3777 `sentence-end-without-space'.
3782 *** `buffer-undo-list' can allows programmable elements.
3784 These elements have the form (apply FUNNAME . ARGS), where FUNNAME is
3785 a symbol other than t or nil. That stands for a high-level change
3786 that should be undone by evaluating (apply FUNNAME ARGS).
3788 These entries can also have the form (apply DELTA BEG END FUNNAME . ARGS)
3789 which indicates that the change which took place was limited to the
3790 range BEG...END and increased the buffer size by DELTA.
3793 *** If the buffer's undo list for the current command gets longer than
3794 `undo-outer-limit', garbage collection empties it. This is to prevent
3795 it from using up the available memory and choking Emacs.
3798 ** New `yank-handler' text property can be used to control how
3799 previously killed text on the kill ring is reinserted.
3801 The value of the `yank-handler' property must be a list with one to four
3802 elements with the following format:
3803 (FUNCTION PARAM NOEXCLUDE UNDO).
3805 The `insert-for-yank' function looks for a yank-handler property on
3806 the first character on its string argument (typically the first
3807 element on the kill-ring). If a `yank-handler' property is found,
3808 the normal behavior of `insert-for-yank' is modified in various ways:
3810 When FUNCTION is present and non-nil, it is called instead of `insert'
3811 to insert the string. FUNCTION takes one argument--the object to insert.
3812 If PARAM is present and non-nil, it replaces STRING as the object
3813 passed to FUNCTION (or `insert'); for example, if FUNCTION is
3814 `yank-rectangle', PARAM should be a list of strings to insert as a
3816 If NOEXCLUDE is present and non-nil, the normal removal of the
3817 `yank-excluded-properties' is not performed; instead FUNCTION is
3818 responsible for removing those properties. This may be necessary
3819 if FUNCTION adjusts point before or after inserting the object.
3820 If UNDO is present and non-nil, it is a function that will be called
3821 by `yank-pop' to undo the insertion of the current object. It is
3822 called with two arguments, the start and end of the current region.
3823 FUNCTION can set `yank-undo-function' to override the UNDO value.
3825 *** The functions `kill-new', `kill-append', and `kill-region' now have an
3826 optional argument to specify the `yank-handler' text property to put on
3829 *** The function `yank-pop' will now use a non-nil value of the variable
3830 `yank-undo-function' (instead of `delete-region') to undo the previous
3831 `yank' or `yank-pop' command (or a call to `insert-for-yank'). The function
3832 `insert-for-yank' automatically sets that variable according to the UNDO
3833 element of the string argument's `yank-handler' text property if present.
3835 *** The function `insert-for-yank' now supports strings where the
3836 `yank-handler' property does not span the first character of the
3837 string. The old behavior is available if you call
3838 `insert-for-yank-1' instead.
3840 ** Syntax table changes:
3843 *** The macro `with-syntax-table' no longer copies the syntax table.
3846 *** The new function `syntax-after' returns the syntax code
3847 of the character after a specified buffer position, taking account
3848 of text properties as well as the character code.
3851 *** `syntax-class' extracts the class of a syntax code (as returned
3855 *** The new function `syntax-ppss' rovides an efficient way to find the
3856 current syntactic context at point.
3858 ** File operation changes:
3861 *** New vars `exec-suffixes' and `load-suffixes' used when
3862 searching for an executable or an Emacs Lisp file.
3865 *** The new primitive `set-file-times' sets a file's access and
3866 modification times. Magic file name handlers can handle this
3870 *** The new function `file-remote-p' tests a file name and returns
3871 non-nil if it specifies a remote file (one that Emacs accesses using
3872 its own special methods and not directly through the file system).
3873 The value in that case is an identifier for the remote file system.
3876 *** `buffer-auto-save-file-format' is the new name for what was
3877 formerly called `auto-save-file-format'. It is now a permanent local.
3880 *** Functions `file-name-sans-extension' and `file-name-extension' now
3881 ignore the leading dots in file names, so that file names such as
3882 `.emacs' are treated as extensionless.
3885 *** `copy-file' now takes an additional option arg MUSTBENEW.
3887 This argument works like the MUSTBENEW argument of write-file.
3890 *** `visited-file-modtime' and `calendar-time-from-absolute' now return
3891 a list of two integers, instead of a cons.
3894 *** `file-chase-links' now takes an optional second argument LIMIT which
3895 specifies the maximum number of links to chase through. If after that
3896 many iterations the file name obtained is still a symbolic link,
3897 `file-chase-links' returns it anyway.
3900 *** The new hook `before-save-hook' is invoked by `basic-save-buffer'
3901 before saving buffers. This allows packages to perform various final
3902 tasks, for example; it can be used by the copyright package to make
3903 sure saved files have the current year in any copyright headers.
3906 *** If `buffer-save-without-query' is non-nil in some buffer,
3907 `save-some-buffers' will always save that buffer without asking (if
3911 *** New function `locate-file' searches for a file in a list of directories.
3912 `locate-file' accepts a name of a file to search (a string), and two
3913 lists: a list of directories to search in and a list of suffixes to
3914 try; typical usage might use `exec-path' and `load-path' for the list
3915 of directories, and `exec-suffixes' and `load-suffixes' for the list
3916 of suffixes. The function also accepts a predicate argument to
3917 further filter candidate files.
3919 One advantage of using this function is that the list of suffixes in
3920 `exec-suffixes' is OS-dependant, so this function will find
3921 executables without polluting Lisp code with OS dependancies.
3924 *** The precedence of file name handlers has been changed.
3926 Instead of choosing the first handler that matches,
3927 `find-file-name-handler' now gives precedence to a file name handler
3928 that matches nearest the end of the file name. More precisely, the
3929 handler whose (match-beginning 0) is the largest is chosen. In case
3930 of ties, the old "first matched" rule applies.
3933 *** A file name handler can declare which operations it handles.
3935 You do this by putting an `operation' property on the handler name
3936 symbol. The property value should be a list of the operations that
3937 the handler really handles. It won't be called for any other
3940 This is useful for autoloaded handlers, to prevent them from being
3941 autoloaded when not really necessary.
3944 *** The function `make-auto-save-file-name' is now handled by file
3945 name handlers. This will be exploited for remote files mainly.
3950 *** An interactive specification can now use the code letter 'U' to get
3951 the up-event that was discarded in case the last key sequence read for a
3952 previous `k' or `K' argument was a down-event; otherwise nil is used.
3955 *** The new interactive-specification `G' reads a file name
3956 much like `F', but if the input is a directory name (even defaulted),
3957 it returns just the directory name.
3960 *** Functions `y-or-n-p', `read-char', `read-key-sequence' and the like, that
3961 display a prompt but don't use the minibuffer, now display the prompt
3962 using the text properties (esp. the face) of the prompt string.
3965 *** (while-no-input BODY...) runs BODY, but only so long as no input
3966 arrives. If the user types or clicks anything, BODY stops as if a
3967 quit had occurred. `while-no-input' returns the value of BODY, if BODY
3968 finishes. It returns nil if BODY was aborted by a quit, and t if
3969 BODY was aborted by arrival of input.
3971 ** Minibuffer changes:
3974 *** The new function `minibufferp' returns non-nil if its optional
3975 buffer argument is a minibuffer. If the argument is omitted, it
3976 defaults to the current buffer.
3979 *** New function `minibuffer-selected-window' returns the window which
3980 was selected when entering the minibuffer.
3983 *** `read-from-minibuffer' now accepts an additional argument KEEP-ALL
3984 saying to put all inputs in the history list, even empty ones.
3987 *** The `read-file-name' function now takes an additional argument which
3988 specifies a predicate which the file name read must satify. The
3989 new variable `read-file-name-predicate' contains the predicate argument
3990 while reading the file name from the minibuffer; the predicate in this
3991 variable is used by read-file-name-internal to filter the completion list.
3994 *** The new variable `read-file-name-function' can be used by Lisp code
3995 to override the built-in `read-file-name' function.
3998 *** The new variable `read-file-name-completion-ignore-case' specifies
3999 whether completion ignores case when reading a file name with the
4000 `read-file-name' function.
4003 *** The new function `read-directory-name' for reading a directory name.
4005 It is like `read-file-name' except that the defaulting works better
4006 for directories, and completion inside it shows only directories.
4008 ** Completion changes:
4011 *** The functions `all-completions' and `try-completion' now accept lists
4012 of strings as well as hash-tables additionally to alists, obarrays
4013 and functions. Furthermore, the function `test-completion' is now
4014 exported to Lisp. The keys in alists and hash tables can be either
4015 strings or symbols, which are automatically converted with to strings.
4018 *** The new macro `dynamic-completion-table' supports using functions
4019 as a dynamic completion table.
4021 (dynamic-completion-table FUN)
4023 FUN is called with one argument, the string for which completion is required,
4024 and it should return an alist containing all the intended possible
4025 completions. This alist can be a full list of possible completions so that FUN
4026 can ignore the value of its argument. If completion is performed in the
4027 minibuffer, FUN will be called in the buffer from which the minibuffer was
4028 entered. `dynamic-completion-table' then computes the completion.
4031 *** The new macro `lazy-completion-table' initializes a variable
4032 as a lazy completion table.
4034 (lazy-completion-table VAR FUN &rest ARGS)
4036 If the completion table VAR is used for the first time (e.g., by passing VAR
4037 as an argument to `try-completion'), the function FUN is called with arguments
4038 ARGS. FUN must return the completion table that will be stored in VAR. If
4039 completion is requested in the minibuffer, FUN will be called in the buffer
4040 from which the minibuffer was entered. The return value of
4041 `lazy-completion-table' must be used to initialize the value of VAR.
4044 ** Enhancements to keymaps.
4046 *** Cleaner way to enter key sequences.
4048 You can enter a constant key sequence in a more natural format, the
4049 same one used for saving keyboard macros, using the macro `kbd'. For
4052 (kbd "C-x C-f") => "\^x\^f"
4054 *** Interactive commands can be remapped through keymaps.
4056 This is an alternative to using `defadvice' or `substitute-key-definition'
4057 to modify the behavior of a key binding using the normal keymap
4058 binding and lookup functionality.
4060 When a key sequence is bound to a command, and that command is
4061 remapped to another command, that command is run instead of the
4065 Suppose that minor mode `my-mode' has defined the commands
4066 `my-kill-line' and `my-kill-word', and it wants C-k (and any other key
4067 bound to `kill-line') to run the command `my-kill-line' instead of
4068 `kill-line', and likewise it wants to run `my-kill-word' instead of
4071 Instead of rebinding C-k and the other keys in the minor mode map,
4072 command remapping allows you to directly map `kill-line' into
4073 `my-kill-line' and `kill-word' into `my-kill-word' using `define-key':
4075 (define-key my-mode-map [remap kill-line] 'my-kill-line)
4076 (define-key my-mode-map [remap kill-word] 'my-kill-word)
4078 When `my-mode' is enabled, its minor mode keymap is enabled too. So
4079 when the user types C-k, that runs the command `my-kill-line'.
4081 Only one level of remapping is supported. In the above example, this
4082 means that if `my-kill-line' is remapped to `other-kill', then C-k still
4083 runs `my-kill-line'.
4085 The following changes have been made to provide command remapping:
4087 - Command remappings are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
4088 `remap', i.e. `(define-key MAP [remap CMD] DEF)' remaps command CMD
4089 to definition DEF in keymap MAP. The definition is not limited to
4090 another command; it can be anything accepted for a normal binding.
4092 - The new function `command-remapping' returns the binding for a
4093 remapped command in the current keymaps, or nil if not remapped.
4095 - `key-binding' now remaps interactive commands unless the optional
4096 third argument NO-REMAP is non-nil.
4098 - `where-is-internal' now returns nil for a remapped command (e.g.
4099 `kill-line', when `my-mode' is enabled), and the actual key binding for
4100 the command it is remapped to (e.g. C-k for my-kill-line).
4101 It also has a new optional fifth argument, NO-REMAP, which inhibits
4102 remapping if non-nil (e.g. it returns "C-k" for `kill-line', and
4103 "<kill-line>" for `my-kill-line').
4105 - The new variable `this-original-command' contains the original
4106 command before remapping. It is equal to `this-command' when the
4107 command was not remapped.
4109 *** If text has a `keymap' property, that keymap takes precedence
4110 over minor mode keymaps.
4112 *** The `keymap' property now also works at the ends of overlays and
4113 text properties, according to their stickiness. This also means that it
4114 works with empty overlays. The same hold for the `local-map' property.
4116 *** Dense keymaps now handle inheritance correctly.
4118 Previously a dense keymap would hide all of the simple-char key
4119 bindings of the parent keymap.
4121 *** `define-key-after' now accepts keys longer than 1.
4123 *** New function `current-active-maps' returns a list of currently
4126 *** New function `describe-buffer-bindings' inserts the list of all
4127 defined keys and their definitions.
4129 *** New function `keymap-prompt' returns the prompt string of a keymap.
4131 *** (map-keymap FUNCTION KEYMAP) applies the function to each binding
4134 *** New variable `emulation-mode-map-alists'.
4136 Lisp packages using many minor mode keymaps can now maintain their own
4137 keymap alist separate from `minor-mode-map-alist' by adding their
4138 keymap alist to this list.
4143 *** The new function `copy-abbrev-table' copies an abbrev table.
4145 It returns a new abbrev table that is a copy of a given abbrev table.
4148 *** `define-abbrev' now accepts an optional argument SYSTEM-FLAG.
4150 If non-nil, this marks the abbrev as a "system" abbrev, which means
4151 that it won't be stored in the user's abbrevs file if he saves the
4152 abbrevs. Major modes that predefine some abbrevs should always
4156 ** Enhancements to process support
4158 *** Function `list-processes' now has an optional argument; if non-nil,
4159 it lists only the processes whose query-on-exit flag is set.
4161 *** New fns `set-process-query-on-exit-flag' and `process-query-on-exit-flag'.
4163 These replace the old function `process-kill-without-query'. That
4164 function is still supported, but new code should use the new
4167 *** Function `signal-process' now accepts a process object or process
4168 name in addition to a process id to identify the signaled process.
4170 *** Processes now have an associated property list where programs can
4171 maintain process state and other per-process related information.
4173 Use the new functions `process-get' and `process-put' to access, add,
4174 and modify elements on this property list. Use the new functions
4175 `process-plist' and `set-process-plist' to access and replace the
4176 entire property list of a process.
4178 *** Function `accept-process-output' has a new optional fourth arg
4179 JUST-THIS-ONE. If non-nil, only output from the specified process
4180 is handled, suspending output from other processes. If value is an
4181 integer, also inhibit running timers. This feature is generally not
4182 recommended, but may be necessary for specific applications, such as
4185 *** Adaptive read buffering of subprocess output.
4187 On some systems, when emacs reads the output from a subprocess, the
4188 output data is read in very small blocks, potentially resulting in
4189 very poor performance. This behavior can be remedied to some extent
4190 by setting the new variable `process-adaptive-read-buffering' to a
4191 non-nil value (the default), as it will automatically delay reading
4192 from such processes, to allowing them to produce more output before
4193 emacs tries to read it.
4195 *** The new function `call-process-shell-command'.
4197 This executes a shell command synchronously in a separate process.
4199 *** The new function `process-file' is similar to `call-process', but
4200 obeys file handlers. The file handler is chosen based on
4201 `default-directory'.
4203 *** A process filter function gets the output as multibyte string
4204 if the process specifies t for its filter's multibyteness.
4206 That multibyteness is decided by the value of
4207 `default-enable-multibyte-characters' when the process is created, and
4208 you can change it later with `set-process-filter-multibyte'.
4210 *** The new function `set-process-filter-multibyte' sets the
4211 multibyteness of the strings passed to the process's filter.
4213 *** The new function `process-filter-multibyte-p' returns the
4214 multibyteness of the strings passed to the process's filter.
4216 *** If a process's coding system is `raw-text' or `no-conversion' and its
4217 buffer is multibyte, the output of the process is at first converted
4218 to multibyte by `string-to-multibyte' then inserted in the buffer.
4219 Previously, it was converted to multibyte by `string-as-multibyte',
4220 which was not compatible with the behavior of file reading.
4223 ** Enhanced networking support.
4225 *** The new `make-network-process' function makes network connections.
4226 It allows opening of stream and datagram connections to a server, as well as
4227 create a stream or datagram server inside emacs.
4229 - A server is started using :server t arg.
4230 - Datagram connection is selected using :type 'datagram arg.
4231 - A server can open on a random port using :service t arg.
4232 - Local sockets are supported using :family 'local arg.
4233 - Non-blocking connect is supported using :nowait t arg.
4234 - The process' property list can be initialized using :plist PLIST arg;
4235 a copy of the server process' property list is automatically inherited
4236 by new client processes created to handle incoming connections.
4238 To test for the availability of a given feature, use featurep like this:
4239 (featurep 'make-network-process '(:type datagram))
4241 *** The old `open-network-stream' now uses `make-network-process'.
4243 *** New functions `process-datagram-address', `set-process-datagram-address'.
4245 These functions are used with datagram-based network processes to get
4246 and set the current address of the remote partner.
4248 *** New function `format-network-address'.
4250 This function reformats the Lisp representation of a network address
4251 to a printable string. For example, an IP address A.B.C.D and port
4252 number P is represented as a five element vector [A B C D P], and the
4253 printable string returned for this vector is "A.B.C.D:P". See the doc
4254 string for other formatting options.
4256 *** `process-contact' has an optional KEY argument.
4258 Depending on this argument, you can get the complete list of network
4259 process properties or a specific property. Using :local or :remote as
4260 the KEY, you get the address of the local or remote end-point.
4262 An Inet address is represented as a 5 element vector, where the first
4263 4 elements contain the IP address and the fifth is the port number.
4265 *** New functions `stop-process' and `continue-process'.
4267 These functions stop and restart communication through a network
4268 connection. For a server process, no connections are accepted in the
4269 stopped state. For a client process, no input is received in the
4272 *** New function `network-interface-list'.
4274 This function returns a list of network interface names and their
4275 current network addresses.
4277 *** New function `network-interface-info'.
4279 This function returns the network address, hardware address, current
4280 status, and other information about a specific network interface.
4282 *** Deleting a network process with `delete-process' calls the sentinel.
4284 The status message passed to the sentinel for a deleted network
4285 process is "deleted". The message passed to the sentinel when the
4286 connection is closed by the remote peer has been changed to
4287 "connection broken by remote peer".
4289 ** Using window objects:
4292 *** New function `window-body-height'.
4294 This is like `window-height' but does not count the mode line or the
4298 *** New function `window-body-height'.
4300 This is like `window-height' but does not count the mode line
4304 *** You can now make a window as short as one line.
4306 A window that is just one line tall does not display either a mode
4307 line or a header line, even if the variables `mode-line-format' and
4308 `header-line-format' call for them. A window that is two lines tall
4309 cannot display both a mode line and a header line at once; if the
4310 variables call for both, only the mode line actually appears.
4313 *** The new function `window-inside-edges' returns the edges of the
4314 actual text portion of the window, not including the scroll bar or
4315 divider line, the fringes, the display margins, the header line and
4319 *** The new functions `window-pixel-edges' and `window-inside-pixel-edges'
4320 return window edges in units of pixels, rather than columns and lines.
4323 *** The new macro `with-selected-window' temporarily switches the
4324 selected window without impacting the order of `buffer-list'.
4325 It saves and restores the current buffer, too.
4328 *** `select-window' takes an optional second argument NORECORD.
4330 This is like `switch-to-buffer'.
4333 *** `save-selected-window' now saves and restores the selected window
4334 of every frame. This way, it restores everything that can be changed
4335 by calling `select-window'. It also saves and restores the current
4339 *** `set-window-buffer' has an optional argument KEEP-MARGINS.
4341 If non-nil, that says to preserve the window's current margin, fringe,
4342 and scroll-bar settings.
4345 ** Customizable fringe bitmaps
4347 *** New function `define-fringe-bitmap' can now be used to create new
4348 fringe bitmaps, as well as change the built-in fringe bitmaps.
4350 To change a built-in bitmap, do (require 'fringe) and use the symbol
4351 identifing the bitmap such as `left-truncation or `continued-line'.
4353 *** New function `destroy-fringe-bitmap' deletes a fringe bitmap
4354 or restores a built-in one to its default value.
4356 *** New function `set-fringe-bitmap-face' specifies the face to be
4357 used for a specific fringe bitmap. The face is automatically merged
4358 with the `fringe' face, so normally, the face should only specify the
4359 foreground color of the bitmap.
4361 *** There are new display properties, `left-fringe' and `right-fringe',
4362 that can be used to show a specific bitmap in the left or right fringe
4363 bitmap of the display line.
4365 Format is `display (left-fringe BITMAP [FACE])', where BITMAP is a
4366 symbol identifying a fringe bitmap, either built-in or defined with
4367 `define-fringe-bitmap', and FACE is an optional face name to be used
4368 for displaying the bitmap instead of the default `fringe' face.
4369 When specified, FACE is automatically merged with the `fringe' face.
4371 *** New function `fringe-bitmaps-at-pos' returns the current fringe
4372 bitmaps in the display line at a given buffer position.
4374 ** Other window fringe features:
4377 *** Controlling the default left and right fringe widths.
4379 The default left and right fringe widths for all windows of a frame
4380 can now be controlled by setting the `left-fringe' and `right-fringe'
4381 frame parameters to an integer value specifying the width in pixels.
4382 Setting the width to 0 effectively removes the corresponding fringe.
4384 The actual default fringe widths for the frame may deviate from the
4385 specified widths, since the combined fringe widths must match an
4386 integral number of columns. The extra width is distributed evenly
4387 between the left and right fringe. For force a specific fringe width,
4388 specify the width as a negative integer (if both widths are negative,
4389 only the left fringe gets the specified width).
4391 Setting the width to nil (the default), restores the default fringe
4392 width which is the minimum number of pixels necessary to display any
4393 of the currently defined fringe bitmaps. The width of the built-in
4394 fringe bitmaps is 8 pixels.
4397 *** Per-window fringe and scrollbar settings
4399 **** Windows can now have their own individual fringe widths and
4402 To control the fringe widths of a window, either set the buffer-local
4403 variables `left-fringe-width', `right-fringe-width', or call
4404 `set-window-fringes'.
4406 To control the fringe position in a window, that is, whether fringes
4407 are positioned between the display margins and the window's text area,
4408 or at the edges of the window, either set the buffer-local variable
4409 `fringes-outside-margins' or call `set-window-fringes'.
4411 The function `window-fringes' can be used to obtain the current
4412 settings. To make `left-fringe-width', `right-fringe-width', and
4413 `fringes-outside-margins' take effect, you must set them before
4414 displaying the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force
4415 an update of the display margins.
4417 **** Windows can now have their own individual scroll-bar settings
4418 controlling the width and position of scroll-bars.
4420 To control the scroll-bar of a window, either set the buffer-local
4421 variables `scroll-bar-mode' and `scroll-bar-width', or call
4422 `set-window-scroll-bars'. The function `window-scroll-bars' can be
4423 used to obtain the current settings. To make `scroll-bar-mode' and
4424 `scroll-bar-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
4425 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
4426 of the display margins.
4428 ** Redisplay features:
4431 *** `sit-for' can now be called with args (SECONDS &optional NODISP).
4434 *** New function `force-window-update' can initiate a full redisplay of
4435 one or all windows. Normally, this is not needed as changes in window
4436 contents are detected automatically. However, certain implicit
4437 changes to mode lines, header lines, or display properties may require
4438 forcing an explicit window update.
4441 *** (char-displayable-p CHAR) returns non-nil if Emacs ought to be able
4442 to display CHAR. More precisely, if the selected frame's fontset has
4443 a font to display the character set that CHAR belongs to.
4445 Fontsets can specify a font on a per-character basis; when the fontset
4446 does that, this value cannot be accurate.
4449 *** You can define multiple overlay arrows via the new
4450 variable `overlay-arrow-variable-list'.
4452 It contains a list of varibles which contain overlay arrow position
4453 markers, including the original `overlay-arrow-position' variable.
4455 Each variable on this list can have individual `overlay-arrow-string'
4456 and `overlay-arrow-bitmap' properties that specify an overlay arrow
4457 string (for non-window terminals) or fringe bitmap (for window
4458 systems) to display at the corresponding overlay arrow position.
4459 If either property is not set, the default `overlay-arrow-string' or
4460 'overlay-arrow-fringe-bitmap' will be used.
4463 *** New `line-height' and `line-spacing' properties for newline characters
4465 A newline can now have `line-height' and `line-spacing' text or overlay
4466 properties that control the height of the corresponding display row.
4468 If the `line-height' property value is t, the newline does not
4469 contribute to the height of the display row; instead the height of the
4470 newline glyph is reduced. Also, a `line-spacing' property on this
4471 newline is ignored. This can be used to tile small images or image
4472 slices without adding blank areas between the images.
4474 If the `line-height' property value is a positive integer, the value
4475 specifies the minimum line height in pixels. If necessary, the line
4476 height it increased by increasing the line's ascent.
4478 If the `line-height' property value is a float, the minimum line
4479 height is calculated by multiplying the default frame line height by
4482 If the `line-height' property value is a cons (FACE . RATIO), the
4483 minimum line height is calculated as RATIO * height of named FACE.
4484 RATIO is int or float. If FACE is t, it specifies the current face.
4486 If the `line-height' property value is a cons (nil . RATIO), the line
4487 height is calculated as RATIO * actual height of the line's contents.
4489 If the `line-height' value is a cons (HEIGHT . TOTAL), HEIGHT specifies
4490 the line height as described above, while TOTAL is any of the forms
4491 described above and specifies the total height of the line, causing a
4492 varying number of pixels to be inserted after the line to make it line
4493 exactly that many pixels high.
4495 If the `line-spacing' property value is an positive integer, the value
4496 is used as additional pixels to insert after the display line; this
4497 overrides the default frame `line-spacing' and any buffer local value of
4498 the `line-spacing' variable.
4500 If the `line-spacing' property is a float or cons, the line spacing
4501 is calculated as specified above for the `line-height' property.
4504 *** The buffer local `line-spacing' variable can now have a float value,
4505 which is used as a height relative to the default frame line height.
4508 *** Enhancements to stretch display properties
4510 The display property stretch specification form `(space PROPS)', where
4511 PROPS is a property list now allows pixel based width and height
4512 specifications, as well as enhanced horizontal text alignment.
4514 The value of these properties can now be a (primitive) expression
4515 which is evaluated during redisplay. The following expressions
4518 EXPR ::= NUM | (NUM) | UNIT | ELEM | POS | IMAGE | FORM
4519 NUM ::= INTEGER | FLOAT | SYMBOL
4520 UNIT ::= in | mm | cm | width | height
4521 ELEM ::= left-fringe | right-fringe | left-margin | right-margin
4523 POS ::= left | center | right
4524 FORM ::= (NUM . EXPR) | (OP EXPR ...)
4527 The form `NUM' specifies a fractional width or height of the default
4528 frame font size. The form `(NUM)' specifies an absolute number of
4529 pixels. If a symbol is specified, its buffer-local variable binding
4530 is used. The `in', `mm', and `cm' units specifies the number of
4531 pixels per inch, milli-meter, and centi-meter, resp. The `width' and
4532 `height' units correspond to the width and height of the current face
4533 font. An image specification corresponds to the width or height of
4536 The `left-fringe', `right-fringe', `left-margin', `right-margin',
4537 `scroll-bar', and `text' elements specify to the width of the
4538 corresponding area of the window.
4540 The `left', `center', and `right' positions can be used with :align-to
4541 to specify a position relative to the left edge, center, or right edge
4542 of the text area. One of the above window elements (except `text')
4543 can also be used with :align-to to specify that the position is
4544 relative to the left edge of the given area. Once the base offset for
4545 a relative position has been set (by the first occurrence of one of
4546 these symbols), further occurences of these symbols are interpreted as
4547 the width of the area.
4549 For example, to align to the center of the left-margin, use
4550 :align-to (+ left-margin (0.5 . left-margin))
4552 If no specific base offset is set for alignment, it is always relative
4553 to the left edge of the text area. For example, :align-to 0 in a
4554 header line aligns with the first text column in the text area.
4556 The value of the form `(NUM . EXPR)' is the value of NUM multiplied by
4557 the value of the expression EXPR. For example, (2 . in) specifies a
4558 width of 2 inches, while (0.5 . IMAGE) specifies half the width (or
4559 height) of the specified image.
4561 The form `(+ EXPR ...)' adds up the value of the expressions.
4562 The form `(- EXPR ...)' negates or subtracts the value of the expressions.
4565 *** Normally, the cursor is displayed at the end of any overlay and
4566 text property string that may be present at the current window
4567 position. The cursor can now be placed on any character of such
4568 strings by giving that character a non-nil `cursor' text property.
4571 *** The display space :width and :align-to text properties are now
4572 supported on text terminals.
4575 *** Support for displaying image slices
4577 **** New display property (slice X Y WIDTH HEIGHT) can be used with
4578 an image property to display only a specific slice of the image.
4580 **** Function `insert-image' has new optional fourth arg to
4581 specify image slice (X Y WIDTH HEIGHT).
4583 **** New function `insert-sliced-image' inserts a given image as a
4584 specified number of evenly sized slices (rows x columns).
4587 *** Images can now have an associated image map via the :map property.
4589 An image map is an alist where each element has the format (AREA ID PLIST).
4590 An AREA is specified as either a rectangle, a circle, or a polygon:
4591 A rectangle is a cons (rect . ((X0 . Y0) . (X1 . Y1))) specifying the
4592 pixel coordinates of the upper left and bottom right corners.
4593 A circle is a cons (circle . ((X0 . Y0) . R)) specifying the center
4594 and the radius of the circle; R can be a float or integer.
4595 A polygon is a cons (poly . [X0 Y0 X1 Y1 ...]) where each pair in the
4596 vector describes one corner in the polygon.
4598 When the mouse pointer is above a hot-spot area of an image, the
4599 PLIST of that hot-spot is consulted; if it contains a `help-echo'
4600 property it defines a tool-tip for the hot-spot, and if it contains
4601 a `pointer' property, it defines the shape of the mouse cursor when
4602 it is over the hot-spot. See the variable `void-area-text-pointer'
4603 for possible pointer shapes.
4605 When you click the mouse when the mouse pointer is over a hot-spot,
4606 an event is composed by combining the ID of the hot-spot with the
4607 mouse event, e.g. [area4 mouse-1] if the hot-spot's ID is `area4'.
4609 ** Mouse pointer features:
4613 *** The mouse pointer shape in void text areas (i.e. after the end of a
4614 line or below the last line in the buffer) of the text window is now
4615 controlled by the new variable `void-text-area-pointer'. The default
4616 is to use the `arrow' (non-text) pointer. Other choices are `text'
4617 (or nil), `hand', `vdrag', `hdrag', `modeline', and `hourglass'.
4620 *** The mouse pointer shape over an image can now be controlled by the
4621 :pointer image property.
4624 *** The mouse pointer shape over ordinary text or images can now be
4625 controlled/overriden via the `pointer' text property.
4627 ** Mouse event enhancements:
4630 *** Mouse events for clicks on window fringes now specify `left-fringe'
4631 or `right-fringe' as the area.
4634 *** All mouse events now include a buffer position regardless of where
4635 you clicked. For mouse clicks in window margins and fringes, this is
4636 a sensible buffer position corresponding to the surrounding text.
4639 *** `posn-point' now returns buffer position for non-text area events.
4642 *** Function `mouse-set-point' now works for events outside text area.
4645 *** New function `posn-area' returns window area clicked on (nil means
4649 *** Mouse events include actual glyph column and row for all event types
4653 *** New function `posn-actual-col-row' returns the actual glyph coordinates
4654 of the mouse event position.
4657 *** Mouse events can now indicate an image object clicked on.
4660 *** Mouse events include relative X and Y pixel coordinates relative to
4661 the top left corner of the object (image or character) clicked on.
4664 *** Mouse events include the pixel width and height of the object
4665 (image or character) clicked on.
4668 *** New functions 'posn-object', 'posn-object-x-y', 'posn-object-width-height'.
4670 These return the image or string object of a mouse click, the X and Y
4671 pixel coordinates relative to the top left corner of that object, and
4672 the total width and height of that object.
4674 ** Text property and overlay changes:
4677 *** Arguments for `remove-overlays' are now optional, so that you can
4678 remove all overlays in the buffer with just (remove-overlays).
4681 *** New variable `char-property-alias-alist'.
4683 This variable allows you to create alternative names for text
4684 properties. It works at the same level as `default-text-properties',
4685 although it applies to overlays as well. This variable was introduced
4686 to implement the `font-lock-face' property.
4689 *** New function `get-char-property-and-overlay' accepts the same
4690 arguments as `get-char-property' and returns a cons whose car is the
4691 return value of `get-char-property' called with those arguments and
4692 whose cdr is the overlay in which the property was found, or nil if
4693 it was found as a text property or not found at all.
4696 *** The new function `remove-list-of-text-properties'.
4698 It is like `remove-text-properties' except that it takes a list of
4699 property names as argument rather than a property list.
4704 *** The new face attribute condition `min-colors' can be used to tailor
4705 the face color to the number of colors supported by a display, and
4706 define the foreground and background colors accordingly so that they
4707 look best on a terminal that supports at least this many colors. This
4708 is now the preferred method for defining default faces in a way that
4709 makes a good use of the capabilities of the display.
4712 *** New function `display-supports-face-attributes-p' can be used to test
4713 whether a given set of face attributes is actually displayable.
4715 A new predicate `supports' has also been added to the `defface' face
4716 specification language, which can be used to do this test for faces
4717 defined with `defface'.
4720 *** The special treatment of faces whose names are of the form `fg:COLOR'
4721 or `bg:COLOR' has been removed. Lisp programs should use the
4722 `defface' facility for defining faces with specific colors, or use
4723 the feature of specifying the face attributes :foreground and :background
4724 directly in the `face' property instead of using a named face.
4727 *** The first face specification element in a defface can specify
4728 `default' instead of frame classification. Then its attributes act as
4729 defaults that apply to all the subsequent cases (and can be overridden
4733 *** The variable `face-font-rescale-alist' specifies how much larger
4734 (or smaller) font we should use. For instance, if the value is
4735 '((SOME-FONTNAME-PATTERN . 1.3)) and a face requests a font of 10
4736 point, we actually use a font of 13 point if the font matches
4737 SOME-FONTNAME-PATTERN.
4740 *** The function `face-differs-from-default-p' now truly checks
4741 whether the given face displays differently from the default face or
4742 not (previously it did only a very cursory check).
4745 *** `face-attribute', `face-foreground', `face-background', `face-stipple'.
4747 These now accept a new optional argument, INHERIT, which controls how
4748 face inheritance is used when determining the value of a face
4752 *** New functions `face-attribute-relative-p' and `merge-face-attribute'
4753 help with handling relative face attributes.
4756 *** The priority of faces in an :inherit attribute face list is reversed.
4758 If a face contains an :inherit attribute with a list of faces, earlier
4759 faces in the list override later faces in the list; in previous
4760 releases of Emacs, the order was the opposite. This change was made
4761 so that :inherit face lists operate identically to face lists in text
4765 *** On terminals, faces with the :inverse-video attribute are displayed
4766 with swapped foreground and background colors even when one of them is
4767 not specified. In previous releases of Emacs, if either foreground
4768 or background color was unspecified, colors were not swapped. This
4769 was inconsistent with the face behavior under X.
4772 *** `set-fontset-font', `fontset-info', `fontset-font' now operate on
4773 the default fontset if the argument NAME is nil..
4775 ** Font-Lock changes:
4778 *** New special text property `font-lock-face'.
4780 This property acts like the `face' property, but it is controlled by
4781 M-x font-lock-mode. It is not, strictly speaking, a builtin text
4782 property. Instead, it is implemented inside font-core.el, using the
4783 new variable `char-property-alias-alist'.
4786 *** font-lock can manage arbitrary text-properties beside `face'.
4788 **** the FACENAME returned in `font-lock-keywords' can be a list of the
4789 form (face FACE PROP1 VAL1 PROP2 VAL2 ...) so you can set other
4790 properties than `face'.
4792 **** `font-lock-extra-managed-props' can be set to make sure those
4793 extra properties are automatically cleaned up by font-lock.
4796 *** jit-lock obeys a new text-property `jit-lock-defer-multiline'.
4798 If a piece of text with that property gets contextually refontified
4799 (see `jit-lock-defer-contextually'), then all of that text will
4800 be refontified. This is useful when the syntax of a textual element
4801 depends on text several lines further down (and when `font-lock-multiline'
4802 is not appropriate to solve that problem). For example in Perl:
4810 Adding/removing the last `e' changes the `bar' from being a piece of
4811 text to being a piece of code, so you'd put a `jit-lock-defer-multiline'
4812 property over the second half of the command to force (deferred)
4813 refontification of `bar' whenever the `e' is added/removed.
4815 ** Major mode mechanism changes:
4818 *** `set-auto-mode' now gives the interpreter magic line (if present)
4819 precedence over the file name. Likewise an `<?xml' or `<!DOCTYPE'
4820 declaration will give the buffer XML or SGML mode, based on the new
4821 var `magic-mode-alist'.
4824 *** Use the new function `run-mode-hooks' to run the major mode's mode hook.
4827 *** All major mode functions should now run the new normal hook
4828 `after-change-major-mode-hook', at their very end, after the mode
4829 hooks. `run-mode-hooks' does this automatically.
4832 *** If a major mode function has a non-nil `no-clone-indirect'
4833 property, `clone-indirect-buffer' signals an error if you use
4837 *** Major modes can define `eldoc-documentation-function'
4838 locally to provide Eldoc functionality by some method appropriate to
4842 *** `define-derived-mode' by default creates a new empty abbrev table.
4843 It does not copy abbrevs from the parent mode's abbrev table.
4846 *** The new function `run-mode-hooks' and the new macro `delay-mode-hooks'
4847 are used by `define-derived-mode' to make sure the mode hook for the
4848 parent mode is run at the end of the child mode.
4850 ** Minor mode changes:
4853 *** `define-minor-mode' now accepts arbitrary additional keyword arguments
4854 and simply passes them to `defcustom', if applicable.
4857 *** `minor-mode-list' now holds a list of minor mode commands.
4860 *** `define-global-minor-mode'.
4862 This is a new name for what was formerly called
4863 `easy-mmode-define-global-mode'. The old name remains as an alias.
4865 ** Command loop changes:
4868 *** The new function `called-interactively-p' does what many people
4869 have mistakenly believed `interactive-p' to do: it returns t if the
4870 calling function was called through `call-interactively'.
4872 Only use this when you cannot solve the problem by adding a new
4873 INTERACTIVE argument to the command.
4876 *** The function `commandp' takes an additional optional argument.
4878 If it is non-nil, then `commandp' checks for a function that could be
4879 called with `call-interactively', and does not return t for keyboard
4883 *** When a command returns, the command loop moves point out from
4884 within invisible text, in the same way it moves out from within text
4885 covered by an image or composition property.
4887 This makes it generally unnecessary to mark invisible text as intangible.
4888 This is particularly good because the intangible property often has
4889 unexpected side-effects since the property applies to everything
4890 (including `goto-char', ...) whereas this new code is only run after
4891 `post-command-hook' and thus does not care about intermediate states.
4894 *** If a command sets `transient-mark-mode' to `only', that
4895 enables Transient Mark mode for the following command only.
4896 During that following command, the value of `transient-mark-mode'
4897 is `identity'. If it is still `identity' at the end of the command,
4898 the next return to the command loop changes to nil.
4901 *** Both the variable and the function `disabled-command-hook' have
4902 been renamed to `disabled-command-function'. The variable
4903 `disabled-command-hook' has been kept as an obsolete alias.
4906 *** `emacsserver' now runs `pre-command-hook' and `post-command-hook'
4907 when it receives a request from emacsclient.
4909 ** Lisp file loading changes:
4912 *** `load-history' can now have elements of the form (t . FUNNAME),
4913 which means FUNNAME was previously defined as an autoload (before the
4914 current file redefined it).
4917 *** `load-history' now records (defun . FUNNAME) when a function is
4918 defined. For a variable, it records just the variable name.
4921 *** The function `symbol-file' can now search specifically for function,
4922 variable or face definitions.
4925 *** `provide' and `featurep' now accept an optional second argument
4926 to test/provide subfeatures. Also `provide' now checks `after-load-alist'
4927 and runs any code associated with the provided feature.
4930 *** The variable `recursive-load-depth-limit' has been deleted.
4931 Emacs now signals an error if the same file is loaded with more
4932 than 3 levels of nesting.
4935 ** Byte compiler changes:
4937 *** The byte compiler now displays the actual line and character
4938 position of errors, where possible. Additionally, the form of its
4939 warning and error messages have been brought into line with GNU standards
4940 for these. As a result, you can use next-error and friends on the
4941 compilation output buffer.
4943 *** The new macro `with-no-warnings' suppresses all compiler warnings
4944 inside its body. In terms of execution, it is equivalent to `progn'.
4946 *** You can avoid warnings for possibly-undefined symbols with a
4947 simple convention that the compiler understands. (This is mostly
4948 useful in code meant to be portable to different Emacs versions.)
4949 Write forms like the following, or code that macroexpands into such
4952 (if (fboundp 'foo) <then> <else>)
4953 (if (boundp 'foo) <then> <else)
4955 In the first case, using `foo' as a function inside the <then> form
4956 won't produce a warning if it's not defined as a function, and in the
4957 second case, using `foo' as a variable won't produce a warning if it's
4958 unbound. The test must be in exactly one of the above forms (after
4959 macro expansion), but such tests can be nested. Note that `when' and
4960 `unless' expand to `if', but `cond' doesn't.
4962 *** `(featurep 'xemacs)' is treated by the compiler as nil. This
4963 helps to avoid noisy compiler warnings in code meant to run under both
4964 Emacs and XEmacs and can sometimes make the result significantly more
4965 efficient. Since byte code from recent versions of XEmacs won't
4966 generally run in Emacs and vice versa, this optimization doesn't lose
4969 *** The local variable `no-byte-compile' in Lisp files is now obeyed.
4972 *** When a Lisp file uses CL functions at run-time, compiling the file
4973 now issues warnings about these calls, unless the file performs
4974 (require 'cl) when loaded.
4976 ** Frame operations:
4979 *** New functions `frame-current-scroll-bars' and `window-current-scroll-bars'.
4981 These functions return the current locations of the vertical and
4982 horizontal scroll bars in a frame or window.
4985 *** The new function `modify-all-frames-parameters' modifies parameters
4986 for all (existing and future) frames.
4989 *** The new frame parameter `tty-color-mode' specifies the mode to use
4990 for color support on character terminal frames. Its value can be a
4991 number of colors to support, or a symbol. See the Emacs Lisp
4992 Reference manual for more detailed documentation.
4995 *** When using non-toolkit scroll bars with the default width,
4996 the `scroll-bar-width' frame parameter value is nil.
5001 *** Already true in Emacs 21.1, but not emphasized clearly enough:
5003 Multibyte buffers can now faithfully record all 256 character codes
5004 from 0 to 255. As a result, most of the past reasons to use unibyte
5005 buffers no longer exist. We only know of three reasons to use them
5008 1. If you prefer to use unibyte text all of the time.
5010 2. For reading files into temporary buffers, when you want to avoid
5011 the time it takes to convert the format.
5013 3. For binary files where format conversion would be pointless and
5017 *** `set-buffer-file-coding-system' now takes an additional argument,
5018 NOMODIFY. If it is non-nil, it means don't mark the buffer modified.
5021 *** The new variable `auto-coding-functions' lets you specify functions
5022 to examine a file being visited and deduce the proper coding system
5023 for it. (If the coding system is detected incorrectly for a specific
5024 file, you can put a `coding:' tags to override it.)
5027 *** The new function `merge-coding-systems' fills in unspecified aspects
5028 of one coding system from another coding system.
5031 *** New coding system property `mime-text-unsuitable' indicates that
5032 the coding system's `mime-charset' is not suitable for MIME text
5036 *** New function `decode-coding-inserted-region' decodes a region as if
5037 it is read from a file without decoding.
5040 *** New CCL functions `lookup-character' and `lookup-integer' access
5041 hash tables defined by the Lisp function `define-translation-hash-table'.
5044 *** New function `quail-find-key' returns a list of keys to type in the
5045 current input method to input a character.
5047 ** Mode line changes:
5050 *** New function `format-mode-line'.
5052 This returns the mode line or header line of the selected (or a
5053 specified) window as a string with or without text properties.
5056 *** The new mode-line construct `(:propertize ELT PROPS...)' can be
5057 used to add text properties to mode-line elements.
5060 *** The new `%i' and `%I' constructs for `mode-line-format' can be used
5061 to display the size of the accessible part of the buffer on the mode
5065 *** Mouse-face on mode-line (and header-line) is now supported.
5067 ** Menu manipulation changes:
5070 *** To manipulate the File menu using easy-menu, you must specify the
5071 proper name "file". In previous Emacs versions, you had to specify
5072 "files", even though the menu item itself was changed to say "File"
5073 several versions ago.
5076 *** The dummy function keys made by easy-menu are now always lower case.
5077 If you specify the menu item name "Ada", for instance, it uses `ada'
5078 as the "key" bound by that key binding.
5080 This is relevant only if Lisp code looks for the bindings that were
5081 made with easy-menu.
5084 *** `easy-menu-define' now allows you to use nil for the symbol name
5085 if you don't need to give the menu a name. If you install the menu
5086 into other keymaps right away (MAPS is non-nil), it usually doesn't
5087 need to have a name.
5089 ** Operating system access:
5092 *** The new primitive `get-internal-run-time' returns the processor
5093 run time used by Emacs since start-up.
5096 *** Functions `user-uid' and `user-real-uid' now return floats if the
5097 user UID doesn't fit in a Lisp integer. Function `user-full-name'
5098 accepts a float as UID parameter.
5101 *** New function `locale-info' accesses locale information.
5104 *** On MS Windows, locale-coding-system is used to interact with the OS.
5105 The Windows specific variable w32-system-coding-system, which was
5106 formerly used for that purpose is now an alias for locale-coding-system.
5109 *** New function `redirect-debugging-output' can be used to redirect
5110 debugging output on the stderr file handle to a file.
5115 *** A number of hooks have been renamed to better follow the conventions:
5117 `find-file-hooks' to `find-file-hook',
5118 `find-file-not-found-hooks' to `find-file-not-found-functions',
5119 `write-file-hooks' to `write-file-functions',
5120 `write-contents-hooks' to `write-contents-functions',
5121 `x-lost-selection-hooks' to `x-lost-selection-functions',
5122 `x-sent-selection-hooks' to `x-sent-selection-functions',
5123 `delete-frame-hook' to `delete-frame-functions'.
5125 In each case the old name remains as an alias for the moment.
5128 *** local-write-file-hooks is marked obsolete
5130 Use the LOCAL arg of `add-hook'.
5133 *** New function `x-send-client-message' sends a client message when
5139 *** New variable `gc-cons-percentage' automatically grows the GC cons threshold
5140 as the heap size increases.
5143 *** New variables `gc-elapsed' and `gcs-done' provide extra information
5144 on garbage collection.
5147 *** The normal hook `post-gc-hook' is run at the end of garbage collection.
5149 The hook is run with GC inhibited, so use it with care.
5151 * New Packages for Lisp Programming in Emacs 22.1
5154 ** The new library button.el implements simple and fast `clickable
5155 buttons' in emacs buffers. Buttons are much lighter-weight than the
5156 `widgets' implemented by widget.el, and can be used by lisp code that
5157 doesn't require the full power of widgets. Emacs uses buttons for
5158 such things as help and apropos buffers.
5161 ** The new library tree-widget.el provides a widget to display a set
5162 of hierarchical data as an outline. For example, the tree-widget is
5163 well suited to display a hierarchy of directories and files.
5166 ** The new library bindat.el provides functions to unpack and pack
5167 binary data structures, such as network packets, to and from Lisp
5171 ** master-mode.el implements a minor mode for scrolling a slave
5172 buffer without leaving your current buffer, the master buffer.
5174 It can be used by sql.el, for example: the SQL buffer is the master
5175 and its SQLi buffer is the slave. This allows you to scroll the SQLi
5176 buffer containing the output from the SQL buffer containing the
5179 This is how to use sql.el and master.el together: the variable
5180 sql-buffer contains the slave buffer. It is a local variable in the
5183 (add-hook 'sql-mode-hook
5184 (function (lambda ()
5186 (master-set-slave sql-buffer))))
5187 (add-hook 'sql-set-sqli-hook
5188 (function (lambda ()
5189 (master-set-slave sql-buffer))))
5192 ** The new library benchmark.el does timing measurements on Lisp code.
5194 This includes measuring garbage collection time.
5197 ** The new library testcover.el does test coverage checking.
5199 This is so you can tell whether you've tested all paths in your Lisp
5200 code. It works with edebug.
5202 The function `testcover-start' instruments all functions in a given
5203 file. Then test your code. The function `testcover-mark-all' adds
5204 overlay "splotches" to the Lisp file's buffer to show where coverage
5205 is lacking. The command `testcover-next-mark' (bind it to a key!)
5206 will move point forward to the next spot that has a splotch.
5208 Normally, a red splotch indicates the form was never completely
5209 evaluated; a brown splotch means it always evaluated to the same
5210 value. The red splotches are skipped for forms that can't possibly
5211 complete their evaluation, such as `error'. The brown splotches are
5212 skipped for forms that are expected to always evaluate to the same
5213 value, such as (setq x 14).
5215 For difficult cases, you can add do-nothing macros to your code to
5216 help out the test coverage tool. The macro `noreturn' suppresses a
5217 red splotch. It is an error if the argument to `noreturn' does
5218 return. The macro `1value' suppresses a brown splotch for its argument.
5219 This macro is a no-op except during test-coverage -- then it signals
5220 an error if the argument actually returns differing values.
5222 * Installation changes in Emacs 21.3
5224 ** Support for GNU/Linux on little-endian MIPS and on IBM S390 has
5228 * Changes in Emacs 21.3
5230 ** The obsolete C mode (c-mode.el) has been removed to avoid problems
5233 ** UTF-16 coding systems are available, encoding the same characters
5236 ** There is a new language environment for UTF-8 (set up automatically
5239 ** Translation tables are available between equivalent characters in
5240 different Emacs charsets -- for instance `e with acute' coming from the
5241 Latin-1 and Latin-2 charsets. User options `unify-8859-on-encoding-mode'
5242 and `unify-8859-on-decoding-mode' respectively turn on translation
5243 between ISO 8859 character sets (`unification') on encoding
5244 (e.g. writing a file) and decoding (e.g. reading a file). Note that
5245 `unify-8859-on-encoding-mode' is useful and safe, but
5246 `unify-8859-on-decoding-mode' can cause text to change when you read
5247 it and write it out again without edits, so it is not generally advisable.
5248 By default `unify-8859-on-encoding-mode' is turned on.
5250 ** In Emacs running on the X window system, the default value of
5251 `selection-coding-system' is now `compound-text-with-extensions'.
5253 If you want the old behavior, set selection-coding-system to
5254 compound-text, which may be significantly more efficient. Using
5255 compound-text-with-extensions seems to be necessary only for decoding
5256 text from applications under XFree86 4.2, whose behavior is actually
5257 contrary to the compound text specification.
5260 * Installation changes in Emacs 21.2
5262 ** Support for BSD/OS 5.0 has been added.
5264 ** Support for AIX 5.1 was added.
5267 * Changes in Emacs 21.2
5269 ** Emacs now supports compound-text extended segments in X selections.
5271 X applications can use `extended segments' to encode characters in
5272 compound text that belong to character sets which are not part of the
5273 list of approved standard encodings for X, e.g. Big5. To paste
5274 selections with such characters into Emacs, use the new coding system
5275 compound-text-with-extensions as the value of selection-coding-system.
5277 ** The default values of `tooltip-delay' and `tooltip-hide-delay'
5280 ** On terminals whose erase-char is ^H (Backspace), Emacs
5281 now uses normal-erase-is-backspace-mode.
5283 ** When the *scratch* buffer is recreated, its mode is set from
5284 initial-major-mode, which normally is lisp-interaction-mode,
5285 instead of using default-major-mode.
5287 ** The new option `Info-scroll-prefer-subnodes' causes Info to behave
5288 like the stand-alone Info reader (from the GNU Texinfo package) as far
5289 as motion between nodes and their subnodes is concerned. If it is t
5290 (the default), Emacs behaves as before when you type SPC in a menu: it
5291 visits the subnode pointed to by the first menu entry. If this option
5292 is nil, SPC scrolls to the end of the current node, and only then goes
5293 to the first menu item, like the stand-alone reader does.
5295 This change was already in Emacs 21.1, but wasn't advertised in the
5299 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 21.2
5301 ** The meanings of scroll-up-aggressively and scroll-down-aggressively
5302 have been interchanged, so that the former now controls scrolling up,
5303 and the latter now controls scrolling down.
5305 ** The variable `compilation-parse-errors-filename-function' can
5306 be used to transform filenames found in compilation output.
5309 * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
5311 See the INSTALL file for information on installing extra libraries and
5312 fonts to take advantage of the new graphical features and extra
5313 charsets in this release.
5315 ** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
5317 ** Support for LynxOS has been added.
5319 ** There are new configure options associated with the support for
5320 images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
5323 ** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
5324 support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
5325 maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
5326 build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
5327 necessary changes to unexec.
5329 ** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
5330 Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
5332 ** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
5333 Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5335 ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
5336 the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
5338 ** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
5339 all of the new display features described below. The port currently
5340 lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the
5341 "Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the
5342 description of aspects specific to the Mac.
5344 ** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
5345 new display features described below.
5348 * Changes in Emacs 21.1
5350 ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
5352 The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
5353 Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
5354 oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
5355 of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
5358 ** Emacs has a new face implementation.
5360 The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
5361 font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
5362 height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
5363 These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
5366 Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
5367 These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
5368 under Lisp changes, below.
5370 ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
5372 Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
5373 Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
5374 the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
5375 italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
5376 Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
5377 attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
5380 The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
5381 supported on character terminals.
5383 Emacs automatically remaps all X-style color specifications to one of
5384 the colors supported by the terminal. This means you could have the
5385 same color customizations that work both on a windowed display and on
5386 a TTY or when Emacs is invoked with the -nw option.
5388 ** New default font is Courier 12pt under X.
5392 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
5393 driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
5394 supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
5395 You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' to enable
5398 ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
5400 If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
5401 longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
5402 is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
5403 minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
5405 - User option: max-mini-window-height
5407 Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
5408 fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
5409 specifies a number of lines.
5413 - User option: resize-mini-windows
5415 How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
5416 resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
5417 grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
5420 Default is `grow-only'.
5424 Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see
5425 <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will need version 0.92.26, or later.
5427 ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
5429 When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
5430 from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
5433 ** File selection dialog on MS-Windows is supported.
5435 When a file is visited by clicking File->Open, the MS-Windows version
5436 now pops up a standard file selection dialog where you can select a
5437 file to visit. File->Save As also pops up that dialog.
5439 ** Toolkit scroll bars.
5441 Emacs now uses toolkit scroll bars if available. When configured for
5442 LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scroll bar. Otherwise, when
5443 configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
5444 bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
5445 bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
5448 When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
5449 Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
5450 Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
5451 Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
5452 define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
5453 `s/freebsd.h' as an example.
5455 Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
5456 a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
5457 directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
5458 different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
5459 system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
5460 add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
5462 The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
5463 `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
5464 This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
5465 imake configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
5466 Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
5468 ** Tool bar support.
5470 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
5471 of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
5472 changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
5473 displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved
5474 if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome
5477 To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons
5478 for specific modes (with copyright assignments).
5482 Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
5483 mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can
5484 turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
5486 Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
5487 variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
5488 the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
5489 tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
5491 ** Automatic Hscrolling
5493 Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
5494 `automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
5497 If a window is scrolled horizontally with set-window-hscroll, or
5498 scroll-left/scroll-right (C-x <, C-x >), this serves as a lower bound
5499 for automatic horizontal scrolling. Automatic scrolling will scroll
5500 the text more to the left if necessary, but won't scroll the text more
5501 to the right than the column set with set-window-hscroll etc.
5503 ** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
5504 of its own. By default, when a window is selected, the cursor is
5505 solid; otherwise, it is hollow. The user-option
5506 `cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to display the
5507 cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is shown, if
5508 non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown.
5510 ** Fringes to the left and right of windows are used to display
5511 truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
5512 foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
5513 customizing face `fringe'.
5515 ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default.
5516 You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'.
5517 In particular, setting the `:box' attribute to nil turns off the 3D
5518 appearance of the mode line. (The 3D appearance makes the mode line
5519 occupy more space, and thus might cause the first or the last line of
5520 the window to be partially obscured.)
5522 The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older
5523 versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, is now deprecated.
5524 However, setting it to nil will cause the `mode-line' face to be
5525 ignored, and mode-lines to be drawn using the default text face.
5527 ** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
5529 Different parts of the mode line have been made mouse-sensitive on all
5530 systems which support the mouse. Moving the mouse to a
5531 mouse-sensitive part in the mode line changes the appearance of the
5532 mouse pointer to an arrow, and help about available mouse actions is
5533 displayed either in the echo area, or in the tooltip window if you
5536 Currently, the following actions have been defined:
5538 - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line goes to the next buffer.
5540 - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name goes to the previous buffer.
5542 - Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
5543 `*') toggles the status.
5545 - Mouse-3 on the mode name displays a minor-mode menu.
5547 ** Hourglass pointer
5549 Emacs can optionally display an hourglass pointer under X. You can
5550 turn the display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
5554 M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
5555 terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
5556 and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
5559 ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
5561 This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
5562 generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
5563 See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
5566 Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
5567 have to do anything to activate it.
5569 ** The default binding of the Delete key has changed.
5571 The new user-option `normal-erase-is-backspace' can be set to
5572 determine the effect of the Delete and Backspace function keys.
5574 On window systems, the default value of this option is chosen
5575 according to the keyboard used. If the keyboard has both a Backspace
5576 key and a Delete key, and both are mapped to their usual meanings, the
5577 option's default value is set to t, so that Backspace can be used to
5578 delete backward, and Delete can be used to delete forward. On
5579 keyboards which either have only one key (usually labeled DEL), or two
5580 keys DEL and BS which produce the same effect, the option's value is
5581 set to nil, and these keys delete backward.
5583 If not running under a window system, setting this option accomplishes
5584 a similar effect by mapping C-h, which is usually generated by the
5585 Backspace key, to DEL, and by mapping DEL to C-d via
5586 `keyboard-translate'. The former functionality of C-h is available on
5587 the F1 key. You should probably not use this setting on a text-only
5588 terminal if you don't have both Backspace, Delete and F1 keys.
5590 Programmatically, you can call function normal-erase-is-backspace-mode
5591 to toggle the behavior of the Delete and Backspace keys.
5593 ** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been
5594 changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a
5597 ** The <home> and <end> keys now move to the beginning or end of the
5598 current line, respectively. C-<home> and C-<end> move to the
5599 beginning and end of the buffer.
5601 ** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
5602 recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
5605 ** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
5606 file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
5608 ** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
5609 compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
5612 The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs's byte
5613 compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
5616 ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
5618 When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
5619 widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
5620 Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
5622 ** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
5623 more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
5624 now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
5626 ** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
5629 ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
5631 When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
5632 whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
5633 defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
5634 highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
5635 displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
5638 ** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
5639 all frames except the selected one.
5641 ** The new user-option `confirm-kill-emacs' can be customized to
5642 let Emacs ask for confirmation before exiting.
5644 ** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs
5645 header-line (which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window),
5646 so that it remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled.
5647 This behavior may be disabled by customizing the option
5648 `Info-use-header-line'.
5650 ** Polish, Czech, German, and French translations of Emacs' reference card
5651 have been added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex', `cs-refcard.tex',
5652 `de-refcard.tex' and `fr-refcard.tex'. Postscript files are included.
5654 ** An `Emacs Survival Guide', etc/survival.tex, is available.
5656 ** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
5657 `dired-ref.tex'. A French translation is available in
5660 ** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
5661 displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
5662 menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
5663 menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
5665 ** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable through Customize.
5667 You can no longer use `M-x customize-variable' to customize `load-path'
5668 because it now contains a version-dependent component. You can still
5669 use `add-to-list' and `setq' to customize this variable in your
5670 `~/.emacs' init file or to modify it from any Lisp program in general.
5672 ** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
5673 point in a pop-up window.
5675 ** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
5676 under XFree86. To enable this, use the `mouse-wheel-mode' command, or
5677 customize the variable `mouse-wheel-mode'.
5679 The variables `mouse-wheel-follow-mouse' and `mouse-wheel-scroll-amount'
5680 determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
5682 ** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
5683 sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
5684 (On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
5685 You can customize `auto-save-list-file-prefix' to change this location.
5687 ** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
5689 ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
5690 to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
5692 ** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the
5693 trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add
5694 this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'.
5696 ** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will
5697 be added to the end of the buffer even if `require-final-newline' is
5700 ** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
5701 set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
5702 file that is already visited under a different name.
5704 ** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
5705 nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
5707 ** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
5708 and displays information about that.
5710 ** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
5711 expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
5713 This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
5714 determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
5715 mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
5716 interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
5717 regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
5718 associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
5720 ** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
5721 suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
5723 ** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
5724 buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
5725 contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
5726 by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
5727 insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
5728 the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
5729 Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
5731 ** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
5732 been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
5734 ** The new Custom option `keyboard-coding-system' specifies a coding
5735 system for keyboard input.
5737 ** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
5738 coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
5739 escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
5740 such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
5741 recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
5742 always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
5743 read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
5744 (`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
5745 RET C-x C-f filename RET.
5747 ** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
5748 environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
5750 ** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
5751 displays all characters in that character set.
5753 ** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
5754 coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
5756 ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
5757 and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
5758 LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
5760 ** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
5761 Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
5762 8859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
5763 GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet but recent X releases have
5764 8859-15. See etc/INSTALL for information on obtaining extra fonts.
5765 There are new Leim input methods for Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix (only)
5768 ** New language environments `Dutch' and `Spanish'.
5769 These new environments mainly select appropriate translations
5772 ** In Ethiopic language environment, special key bindings for
5773 function keys are changed as follows. This is to conform to "Emacs
5774 Lisp Coding Convention".
5776 new command old-binding
5777 --- ------- -----------
5778 f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-buffer f5
5779 S-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-region f5
5780 C-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-mail-or-marker f5
5782 f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-buffer unchanged
5783 S-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-region unchanged
5784 C-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-mail-or-marker unchanged
5786 S-f5 ethio-toggle-punctuation f3
5787 S-f6 ethio-modify-vowel f6
5788 S-f7 ethio-replace-space f7
5789 S-f8 ethio-input-special-character f8
5790 S-f9 ethio-replace-space unchanged
5791 C-f9 ethio-toggle-space f2
5793 ** There are new Leim input methods.
5794 New input methods "turkish-postfix", "turkish-alt-postfix",
5795 "greek-mizuochi", "TeX", and "greek-babel" are now part of the Leim
5798 ** The rule of input method "slovak" is slightly changed. Now the
5799 rules for translating "q" and "Q" to "`" (backquote) are deleted, thus
5800 typing them inserts "q" and "Q" respectively. Rules for translating
5801 "=q", "+q", "=Q", and "+Q" to "`" are also deleted. Now, to input
5802 "`", you must type "=q".
5804 ** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
5805 8859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
5806 more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
5807 empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
5808 window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
5811 ** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
5812 on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
5813 defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
5814 commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
5816 ** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
5817 `display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
5818 indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
5819 indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
5821 ** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
5822 on the display using several methods
5824 - By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
5825 a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
5826 be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
5828 - By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
5829 equivalent to specifying the frame parameter.
5831 - By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
5833 - By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
5834 the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
5836 ** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
5837 an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
5838 command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
5839 does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
5841 ** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
5842 `make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
5843 typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
5845 ** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
5846 characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
5848 ** New X resources recognized
5850 *** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
5851 whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
5852 is useful for debugging X problems.
5856 emacs.synchronous: true
5858 *** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
5859 visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
5860 the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
5861 and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
5862 visual class names are
5871 Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
5872 `pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
5875 The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
5876 supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
5877 `visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
5882 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
5884 *** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
5885 specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
5886 default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
5887 resource values are `true' or `on'.
5891 emacs.privateColormap: true
5893 ** Faces and frame parameters.
5895 There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
5896 Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
5897 `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
5898 `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
5899 sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
5900 for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
5901 parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
5903 Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
5904 `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
5905 `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
5906 `default' face and vice versa.
5910 The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
5912 ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
5914 The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
5915 colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
5916 correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
5917 the screen gamma of a frame's display.
5919 PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
5920 in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
5921 color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
5923 The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
5926 ** Tabs and variable-width text.
5928 Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
5929 defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
5930 independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
5931 Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
5933 ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
5935 *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
5937 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
5939 The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
5942 *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
5945 ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
5947 As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
5948 drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
5949 `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
5951 ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
5952 bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi and Less).
5954 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
5955 `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
5956 variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
5958 ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
5960 When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
5961 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a
5962 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
5963 fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
5965 When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
5966 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggressively' is a
5967 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
5968 fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
5970 ** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
5971 M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
5972 M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
5975 ** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
5977 ** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
5978 abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
5979 `directory-abbrev-alist'.
5981 ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
5982 the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
5983 forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
5984 value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
5985 users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
5986 even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
5988 The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
5990 ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
5991 notably at the end of lines.
5993 All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
5994 spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
5996 ** The function `replace-rectangle' is an alias for `string-rectangle'.
5998 ** The new command M-x string-insert-rectangle is like `string-rectangle',
5999 but inserts text instead of replacing it.
6001 ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
6002 query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
6003 after each match to get the replacement text.
6005 ** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
6006 you edit the replacement string.
6008 ** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB'
6009 (if you load the library `mailabbrev'), lets you complete mail aliases
6010 in the text, analogous to lisp-complete-symbol.
6012 ** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
6014 ** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
6015 to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
6017 ** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
6018 the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
6019 MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
6020 displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
6023 ** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
6024 read mail from the menu etc.
6026 ** The environment variable `EMACSLOCKDIR' is no longer used on MS-Windows.
6027 This environment variable was used when creating lock files. Emacs on
6028 MS-Windows does not use this variable anymore. This change was made
6029 before Emacs 21.1, but wasn't documented until now.
6031 ** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
6032 MS-DOS version of Emacs.
6034 ** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces the MS-DOS version
6035 of Emacs to behave as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons.
6036 This comes handy with mice that don't report their number of buttons
6037 correctly. One example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons,
6038 but clicks on the middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version
6041 ** Customize changes
6043 *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
6044 `State' menu to add comments, or give a prefix argument to
6045 M-x customize-set-variable or M-x customize-set-value. Note that
6046 customization comments will cause the customizations to fail in
6047 earlier versions of Emacs.
6049 *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
6050 Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
6053 *** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it
6054 does not allow you to save customizations in your `~/.emacs' init
6055 file. This is because saving customizations from such a session would
6056 wipe out all the other customizationss you might have on your init
6059 ** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it
6060 does not save disabled and enabled commands for future sessions, to
6061 avoid overwriting existing customizations of this kind that are
6062 already in your init file.
6064 ** New features in evaluation commands
6066 *** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
6067 modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
6068 print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the new
6069 customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
6070 eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
6072 The default values for the first two of these variables are 12 and 4
6073 respectively, which means that `eval-expression' now prints at most
6074 the first 12 members of a list and at most 4 nesting levels deep (if
6075 the list is longer or deeper than that, an ellipsis `...' is
6078 <RET> or <mouse-2> on the printed text toggles between an abbreviated
6079 printed representation and an unabbreviated one.
6081 The default value of eval-expression-debug-on-error is t, so any error
6082 during evaluation produces a backtrace.
6084 *** The function `eval-defun' (C-M-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
6085 code when called with a prefix argument.
6089 Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
6090 current user setups (although it's believed that these
6091 incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
6092 However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
6093 back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
6094 compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
6097 *** The hardcoded switch to "java" style in Java mode is gone.
6098 CC Mode used to automatically set the style to "java" when Java mode
6099 is entered. This has now been removed since it caused too much
6102 However, to keep backward compatibility to a certain extent, the
6103 default value for c-default-style now specifies the "java" style for
6104 java-mode, but "gnu" for all other modes (as before). So you won't
6105 notice the change if you haven't touched that variable.
6107 *** New cleanups, space-before-funcall and compact-empty-funcall.
6108 Two new cleanups have been added to c-cleanup-list:
6110 space-before-funcall causes a space to be inserted before the opening
6111 parenthesis of a function call, which gives the style "foo (bar)".
6113 compact-empty-funcall causes any space before a function call opening
6114 parenthesis to be removed if there are no arguments to the function.
6115 It's typically useful together with space-before-funcall to get the
6116 style "foo (bar)" and "foo()".
6118 *** Some keywords now automatically trigger reindentation.
6119 Keywords like "else", "while", "catch" and "finally" have been made
6120 "electric" to make them reindent automatically when they continue an
6121 earlier statement. An example:
6123 for (i = 0; i < 17; i++)
6125 res += a[i]->offset;
6128 Here, the "else" should be indented like the preceding "if", since it
6129 continues that statement. CC Mode will automatically reindent it after
6130 the "else" has been typed in full, since it's not until then it's
6131 possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a continuation of
6134 CC Mode uses Abbrev mode to achieve this, which is therefore turned on
6137 *** M-a and M-e now moves by sentence in multiline strings.
6138 Previously these two keys only moved by sentence in comments, which
6139 meant that sentence movement didn't work in strings containing
6140 documentation or other natural language text.
6142 The reason it's only activated in multiline strings (i.e. strings that
6143 contain a newline, even when escaped by a '\') is to avoid stopping in
6144 the short strings that often reside inside statements. Multiline
6145 strings almost always contain text in a natural language, as opposed
6146 to other strings that typically contain format specifications,
6147 commands, etc. Also, it's not that bothersome that M-a and M-e misses
6148 sentences in single line strings, since they're short anyway.
6150 *** Support for autodoc comments in Pike mode.
6151 Autodoc comments for Pike are used to extract documentation from the
6152 source, like Javadoc in Java. Pike mode now recognize this markup in
6153 comment prefixes and paragraph starts.
6155 *** The comment prefix regexps on c-comment-prefix may be mode specific.
6156 When c-comment-prefix is an association list, it specifies the comment
6157 line prefix on a per-mode basis, like c-default-style does. This
6158 change came about to support the special autodoc comment prefix in
6161 *** Better handling of syntactic errors.
6162 The recovery after unbalanced parens earlier in the buffer has been
6163 improved; CC Mode now reports them by dinging and giving a message
6164 stating the offending line, but still recovers and indent the
6165 following lines in a sane way (most of the time). An "else" with no
6166 matching "if" is handled similarly. If an error is discovered while
6167 indenting a region, the whole region is still indented and the error
6168 is reported afterwards.
6170 *** Lineup functions may now return absolute columns.
6171 A lineup function can give an absolute column to indent the line to by
6172 returning a vector with the desired column as the first element.
6174 *** More robust and warning-free byte compilation.
6175 Although this is strictly not a user visible change (well, depending
6176 on the view of a user), it's still worth mentioning that CC Mode now
6177 can be compiled in the standard ways without causing trouble. Some
6178 code have also been moved between the subpackages to enhance the
6179 modularity somewhat. Thanks to Martin Buchholz for doing the
6182 *** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
6183 This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
6184 of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
6185 non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
6186 want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
6189 Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
6190 situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
6191 and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
6192 If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
6193 the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
6194 by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
6196 *** New initialization procedure for the style system.
6197 When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
6198 variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
6199 take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
6200 is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
6201 settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
6202 possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
6203 Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
6205 By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
6206 special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
6207 the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
6208 of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
6211 Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
6212 when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
6213 function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
6214 call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
6215 then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
6216 values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
6217 only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
6218 function documentation for more info.
6220 The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
6221 especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
6222 with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
6223 intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
6224 such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
6225 is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
6226 configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
6227 global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
6229 (Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
6231 **** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
6232 This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
6234 This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
6235 variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
6236 completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
6237 the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
6238 empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
6241 **** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
6242 In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
6243 c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
6246 *** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
6247 CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
6248 surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
6249 chapter about this in the manual.
6251 **** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
6252 The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
6253 recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
6254 primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
6255 adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
6257 **** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
6258 This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
6259 c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
6261 **** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
6262 This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
6264 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
6265 Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
6266 A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
6269 Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
6270 causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
6271 the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
6272 available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
6275 **** The variables `c-hanging-comment-starter-p' and
6276 `c-hanging-comment-ender-p', which controlled how comment starters and
6277 enders were filled, are not used anymore. The new version of the
6278 function `c-fill-paragraph' keeps the comment starters and enders as
6279 they were before the filling.
6281 **** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
6282 The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
6283 specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
6286 **** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
6287 It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
6288 prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
6289 you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
6292 *** Fixes to IDL mode.
6293 It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
6294 to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
6295 struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
6296 Thanks to Eric Eide.
6298 *** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
6299 It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
6300 opening braces hangs and when they don't.
6302 **** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
6304 *** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
6305 See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
6306 better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
6307 and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
6309 *** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
6310 previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
6311 the column specified by comment-column.
6313 *** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
6314 In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
6315 is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
6316 prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
6317 contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
6318 don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
6320 *** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
6321 instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
6324 *** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
6326 *** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
6327 c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
6328 c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
6329 variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
6332 *** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
6336 *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
6337 command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
6338 is, delete only empty directories.
6340 *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
6341 command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
6342 copy directories recursively.
6344 *** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
6345 in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
6346 the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
6348 *** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
6349 replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
6352 *** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `y') shows
6353 a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
6354 This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
6355 will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
6356 accurate or inaccurate as it is.
6358 *** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
6361 *** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
6362 of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
6363 which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
6364 source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
6368 The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
6369 four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
6370 internationalization and mail-fetching.
6372 *** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
6373 many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
6375 If you used procmail like in
6377 (setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
6378 (setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
6379 (setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
6380 (setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
6382 this now has changed to
6385 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
6388 More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
6389 Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
6391 *** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
6392 Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
6393 Separate MIME packages like RMIME, mime-compose etc., will probably no
6394 longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
6396 The FLIM/SEMI package still works with Emacs 21, but if you want to
6397 use the native facilities, you must remove any mailcap.el[c] that was
6398 installed by FLIM/SEMI version 1.13 or earlier.
6400 *** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
6401 parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
6402 are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
6403 now just a compatibility layer.
6405 *** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
6408 *** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
6409 called to position point.
6411 *** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
6412 summary buffers and NOV files.
6414 *** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
6415 of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
6417 *** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
6418 subtly different manner.
6420 *** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
6421 and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
6422 ever-changing layouts.
6424 *** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
6426 *** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support.
6428 ** Changes in Texinfo mode.
6430 *** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
6434 -------------------------
6438 C-c C-c q @quotation
6440 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
6443 *** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
6445 ** Changes in Outline mode.
6447 There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
6448 `outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
6449 the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
6451 ** Changes to Emacs Server
6453 *** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
6454 with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
6455 are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
6456 Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
6457 buffers to kill, as before.
6459 Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
6460 i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
6463 ** Both emacsclient and Emacs itself now accept command line options
6464 of the form +LINE:COLUMN in addition to +LINE.
6466 ** Changes to Show Paren mode.
6468 *** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
6469 The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
6470 use. Default is 1000.
6472 ** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
6473 groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
6475 ** Changes to hideshow.el
6477 *** Generalized block selection and traversal
6479 A block is now recognized by its start and end regexps (both strings),
6480 and an integer specifying which sub-expression in the start regexp
6481 serves as the place where a `forward-sexp'-like function can operate.
6482 See the documentation of variable `hs-special-modes-alist'.
6484 *** During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active,
6485 hidden blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' can
6486 be used in the mode line format to show the line at the beginning of
6489 *** User option `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' specifies a
6490 function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead of
6491 the normal block-hiding function.
6493 *** The command `hs-show-region' has been removed.
6495 *** The key bindings have changed to fit the Emacs conventions,
6496 roughly imitating those of Outline minor mode. Notably, the prefix
6497 for all bindings is now `C-c @'. For details, see the documentation
6498 for `hs-minor-mode'.
6500 *** The variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' has been removed, and
6501 hideshow.el now always behaves as if this variable were set to t.
6503 ** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
6505 *** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
6506 an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
6507 log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
6509 **** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
6512 *** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
6515 *** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
6516 entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
6517 Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
6518 version number is performed based on regular expressions from
6519 `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be customized.
6520 Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
6522 *** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
6524 ** Changes to cmuscheme
6526 *** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
6527 `cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
6529 ** Changes in Font Lock
6531 *** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
6532 font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
6534 *** Multi-line patterns are now supported. Modes using this, should
6535 set font-lock-multiline to t in their font-lock-defaults.
6537 *** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
6538 the face used for each string/comment.
6540 *** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'.
6541 Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code".
6543 ** Changes to Shell mode
6545 *** The `shell' command now accepts an optional argument to specify the buffer
6546 to use, which defaults to "*shell*". When used interactively, a
6547 non-default buffer may be specified by giving the `shell' command a
6548 prefix argument (causing it to prompt for the buffer name).
6550 ** Comint (subshell) changes
6552 These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
6553 include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
6555 *** Comint now by default interprets some carriage-control characters.
6556 Comint now removes CRs from CR LF sequences, and treats single CRs and
6557 BSs in the output in a way similar to a terminal (by deleting to the
6558 beginning of the line, or deleting the previous character,
6559 respectively). This is achieved by adding `comint-carriage-motion' to
6560 the `comint-output-filter-functions' hook by default.
6562 *** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
6563 to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
6564 parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
6565 user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
6566 this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
6567 respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
6568 feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
6569 `comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
6571 *** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
6572 and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
6574 *** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
6575 buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
6576 buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
6578 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
6579 M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
6580 the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
6582 *** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
6583 and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
6584 see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
6586 *** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
6587 saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
6588 argument, it appends to the file.
6590 *** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
6591 (usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
6594 *** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
6597 *** The new variable `comint-input-history-ignore' is a regexp for
6598 identifying history lines that should be ignored, like tcsh time-stamp
6599 strings, starting with a `#'. The default value of this variable is "^#".
6601 ** Changes to Rmail mode
6603 *** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
6604 set to fine tune the identification of the correspondent when
6605 receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
6606 recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
6607 `user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
6610 Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
6611 mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
6612 regexp matching your mail addresses.
6614 *** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
6615 to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
6616 Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
6617 with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
6618 for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
6620 *** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
6623 *** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
6624 specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
6627 *** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
6628 in which folder to put messages automatically.
6630 *** The new function `rmail-redecode-body' allows to fix a message
6631 with non-ASCII characters if Emacs happens to decode it incorrectly
6632 due to missing or malformed "charset=" header.
6634 ** The new user-option `mail-envelope-from' can be used to specify
6635 an envelope-from address different from user-mail-address.
6637 ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
6638 use the -f option when sending mail.
6640 ** The Rmail command `o' (`rmail-output-to-rmail-file') now writes the
6641 current message in the internal `emacs-mule' encoding, rather than in
6642 the encoding taken from the variable `buffer-file-coding-system'.
6643 This allows to save messages whose characters cannot be safely encoded
6644 by the buffer's coding system, and makes sure the message will be
6645 displayed correctly when you later visit the target Rmail file.
6647 If you want your Rmail files be encoded in a specific coding system
6648 other than `emacs-mule', you can customize the variable
6649 `rmail-file-coding-system' to set its value to that coding system.
6651 ** Changes to TeX mode
6653 *** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
6656 *** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
6658 *** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
6660 *** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
6662 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
6664 *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
6665 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
6666 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
6667 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
6668 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
6669 can be edited from that buffer.
6671 *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
6672 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
6673 `A' to use all marked entries).
6675 *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
6676 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
6678 *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
6679 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
6680 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
6683 ** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
6684 The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
6685 semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
6686 in column 1 are always made leaves.
6688 ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
6689 has the following new features:
6691 *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
6692 may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
6693 to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
6694 time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
6696 *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
6697 feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
6698 file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
6699 compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
6700 pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
6703 ** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
6708 *** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
6709 transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
6710 spell-checks the current buffer.
6712 *** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
6715 *** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
6716 correction is made and re-checked.
6718 *** Italian, Portuguese, and Slovak dictionary definitions have been added.
6720 *** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
6723 *** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
6726 *** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
6729 *** Spell checking now works in the MS-DOS version of Emacs.
6731 ** Makefile mode changes
6733 *** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
6735 *** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
6736 Fontlock mode is active.
6740 *** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
6741 so that searches can be resumed.
6743 *** In Isearch mode, C-M-s and C-M-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
6744 respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
6745 that started the search.
6747 *** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
6748 selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
6750 *** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
6752 Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
6753 `isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
6754 search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
6755 before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
6756 highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
6757 `secondary-selection'.
6759 The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
6760 will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
6761 Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
6762 using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
6763 usual snappy response.
6765 If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
6766 matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
6767 set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
6768 isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
6772 VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
6773 easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
6774 Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
6775 to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
6776 changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
6777 `vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of symbols that identify
6778 version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
6779 each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
6780 file is registered in that backend.
6782 When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
6783 backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
6784 directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
6785 master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
6786 the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
6787 As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
6789 The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
6790 still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
6791 RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
6792 vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
6793 where it doesn't make sense.)
6795 The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
6796 obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
6797 `CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
6801 The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
6802 checks are always done now.
6804 VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
6807 `vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
6808 `vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
6809 `vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
6811 The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the
6812 first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the
6813 current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into
6814 the working file (``merge news'').
6816 The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
6817 (vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work
6820 *** Multiple Backends
6822 VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is
6823 useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS
6824 repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally
6825 commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your
6828 To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example)
6829 should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote''
6830 backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of
6831 `vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.)
6833 You can then commit changes to another backend (say, RCS), by typing
6834 C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a backend name as
6835 a revision number). VC registers the file in the more local backend
6836 if that hasn't already happened, and commits to a branch based on the
6837 current revision number from the more remote backend.
6839 If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to
6840 another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change
6841 any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to
6842 pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally.
6844 After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your
6845 changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the
6846 local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry
6847 buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file.
6851 There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
6852 default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
6853 remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
6854 by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
6855 regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
6856 that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
6857 queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
6859 If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of
6860 repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and
6861 revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without
6862 any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version
6863 backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version
6864 number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~
6865 (vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter
6866 of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other,
6867 the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted
6868 automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS,
6869 since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file
6872 If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
6873 repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
6874 If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
6875 commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the
6876 current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
6877 entire directory tree.
6879 The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
6880 "cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
6881 is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
6882 "watched" by other developers.)
6884 The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
6885 (vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give
6886 an empty snapshot name to the latter, that performs a `cvs update',
6887 starting at the given directory.
6889 *** Lisp Changes in VC
6891 VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
6892 add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
6893 library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
6894 then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
6895 a version system named SYS, you write a library named vc-sys.el, which
6896 provides a number of functions vc-sys-... (see commentary at the top
6897 of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
6898 you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the symbol
6899 `SYS' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
6901 ** The customizable EDT emulation package now supports the EDT
6902 SUBS command and EDT scroll margins. It also works with more
6903 terminal/keyboard configurations and it now works under XEmacs.
6904 See etc/edt-user.doc for more information.
6906 ** New modes and packages
6908 *** The new global minor mode `minibuffer-electric-default-mode'
6909 automatically hides the `(default ...)' part of minibuffer prompts when
6910 the default is not applicable.
6912 *** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines,
6913 rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The
6914 shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \.
6918 - Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is
6919 drawn, like this: | \ /
6923 - Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the
6924 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If
6925 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a
6926 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will
6927 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line
6930 - Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight)
6931 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >.
6933 - Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by
6936 - Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular
6937 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be
6938 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in
6939 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa.
6941 - Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can
6942 also do without the mouse.
6944 - Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to
6945 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares
6946 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your
6947 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio,
6948 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round.
6950 - Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented:
6952 lines straight-lines
6954 poly-lines straight poly-lines
6956 text (see-thru) text (overwrite)
6957 spray-can setting size for spraying
6958 vaporize line vaporize lines
6959 erase characters erase rectangles
6961 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or
6962 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in
6963 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while
6966 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines
6967 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are
6968 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired
6969 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>.
6971 - Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this
6974 *** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
6975 implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
6976 It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
6977 functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
6978 history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
6979 will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
6980 the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
6981 rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
6982 all within the scope of your Emacs process.
6984 *** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
6985 intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
6986 typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
6987 on certain projects.
6989 *** The new package hi-lock.el provides commands to highlight matches
6990 of interactively entered regexps. For example,
6992 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
6994 will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
6995 face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
6996 typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
6997 Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
6998 appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
6999 current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
7000 corresponding file is read. There are commands to highlight matches
7001 to phrases and to highlight entire lines containing a match.
7003 *** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
7006 *** The new package tildify.el allows to add hard spaces or other text
7007 fragments in accordance with the current major mode.
7009 *** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
7010 parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
7012 *** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
7013 package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
7014 be more robust while offering the same functionality.
7015 `comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only
7016 comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary.
7018 *** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
7019 facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
7020 separate Texinfo file.
7022 *** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
7023 by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
7024 provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
7025 `log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
7026 enter check-in log messages.
7028 *** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
7029 without invoking external programs.
7031 The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
7032 and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
7033 `manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
7034 is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
7035 Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
7037 The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
7038 page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
7040 *** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
7041 authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
7043 The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
7044 the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
7045 the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
7046 Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
7047 even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
7050 On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
7051 matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
7052 probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
7053 contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
7055 *** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
7056 unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
7057 actually modifying content of a buffer.
7059 *** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
7062 Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
7064 The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
7066 ; comment (until end of line)
7070 $A default non-terminal
7071 $"C" default terminal
7072 $?C? default special
7073 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
7074 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
7075 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
7076 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
7077 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
7078 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
7079 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
7080 C+ one or more occurrences of C
7081 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
7082 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
7083 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
7084 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
7085 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
7086 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
7087 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
7089 Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
7091 *** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
7092 align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
7093 determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
7094 example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
7095 equal signs of assignments.
7097 *** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
7098 paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
7100 *** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
7101 list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
7102 buffer menu with this package. See the Custom group `bs'.
7104 *** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
7106 *** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
7107 replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
7108 is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
7109 and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
7110 not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
7111 which answers different needs.
7113 *** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
7114 suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
7115 expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
7116 course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
7117 reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
7120 *** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
7121 containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
7123 *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
7125 *** hl-line.el provides `hl-line-mode', a minor mode to highlight the
7126 current line in the current buffer. It also provides
7127 `global-hl-line-mode' to provide the same behavior in all buffers.
7129 *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
7131 Please note: if `ansi-color-for-comint-mode' and
7132 `global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
7133 disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
7134 `comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
7135 displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
7136 and background colors.
7138 *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
7141 *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
7144 *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
7146 *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
7148 *** whitespace.el is a package for warning about and cleaning bogus
7149 whitespace in a file.
7151 *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
7152 files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
7153 (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
7154 interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
7155 often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
7156 uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
7157 codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
7159 *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
7161 Here is an example of columns:
7164 dog pineapple car EXTRA
7165 porcupine strawberry airplane
7167 Doing the following settings:
7169 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
7170 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
7171 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
7172 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
7175 Selecting the lines above and typing:
7177 M-x delimit-columns-region
7181 [ horse , apple , bus , ]
7182 [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
7183 [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
7185 delim-col has the following options:
7187 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
7190 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
7191 between each column.
7193 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
7196 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
7199 delim-col has the following commands:
7201 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
7202 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
7204 *** Recentf mode maintains a menu for visiting files that were
7205 operated on recently. User option recentf-menu-filter specifies a
7206 menu filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the
7207 recent file list can be displayed:
7209 - organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
7210 - sorted by file paths, file names, ascending or descending.
7211 - showing paths relative to the current default-directory
7213 The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
7214 dynamically change the menu appearance.
7216 *** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
7219 *** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
7220 of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
7221 specific to Message mode.
7223 *** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
7224 viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
7225 with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
7227 *** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
7228 interface to access directory servers using different directory
7229 protocols. It has a separate manual.
7231 *** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
7232 for Autoconf, selected automatically.
7234 *** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
7236 *** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
7237 minibuffer with completion.
7239 *** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
7240 with the diary features.
7242 *** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
7243 numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
7245 *** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
7248 *** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
7249 facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
7250 difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
7251 they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
7253 *** antlr-mode is a new major mode for editing ANTLR grammar files.
7254 It is automatically turned on for files whose names have the extension
7257 ** Changes in sort.el
7259 The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
7260 as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
7261 new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
7264 ** Changes to Ange-ftp
7266 *** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
7267 names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
7268 sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
7270 *** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
7271 ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
7273 *** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
7274 output ^M at the end of lines.
7276 ** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
7277 mode `iswitchb-mode'.
7279 ** Just loading the msb package doesn't switch on Msb mode anymore.
7280 If you have `(require 'msb)' in your .emacs, please replace it with
7283 ** Flyspell mode has various new options. See the `flyspell' Custom
7286 ** The user option `backward-delete-char-untabify-method' controls the
7287 behavior of `backward-delete-char-untabify'. The following values
7290 `untabify' -- turn a tab to many spaces, then delete one space;
7291 `hungry' -- delete all whitespace, both tabs and spaces;
7292 `all' -- delete all whitespace, including tabs, spaces and newlines;
7293 nil -- just delete one character.
7295 Default value is `untabify'.
7297 [This change was made in Emacs 20.3 but not mentioned then.]
7299 ** In Cperl mode `cperl-invalid-face' should now be a normal face
7300 symbol, not double-quoted.
7302 ** Some packages are declared obsolete, to be removed in a future
7303 version. They are: auto-show, c-mode, hilit19, hscroll, ooutline,
7304 profile, rnews, rnewspost, and sc. Their implementations have been
7305 moved to lisp/obsolete.
7307 ** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
7308 To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
7309 `auto-compression-mode' command.
7311 ** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
7312 `browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME, and
7313 `browse-url-kde' can be chosen for invoking the KDE browser.
7315 ** The user-option `browse-url-new-window-p' has been renamed to
7316 `browse-url-new-window-flag'.
7318 ** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
7319 operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
7321 ** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
7322 is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
7324 ** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
7325 support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
7326 use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
7327 buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
7328 M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
7329 new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
7331 ** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
7332 a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
7334 ** Hexl mode allows to insert non-ASCII characters.
7336 The non-ASCII characters are encoded using the same encoding as the
7337 file you are visiting in Hexl mode.
7339 ** Shell script mode changes.
7341 Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
7342 derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizable, and
7343 sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
7347 *** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
7349 *** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
7350 possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
7351 {lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
7352 This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
7353 a regular expression. The manual contains details.
7355 *** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
7356 declarations when given the --declarations option.
7358 *** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
7359 "operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
7361 *** You shouldn't generally need any more the -C or -c++ option: etags
7362 automatically switches to C++ parsing when it meets the `class' or
7363 `template' keywords.
7365 *** Etags now is able to delve at arbitrary deeps into nested structures in
7366 C-like languages. Previously, it was limited to one or two brace levels.
7368 *** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
7371 *** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
7373 *** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
7375 *** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
7378 *** In makefiles, tags the targets.
7380 *** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
7381 variables are tagged.
7383 *** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
7385 *** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
7388 ** Changes in etags.el
7390 *** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
7391 tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
7392 is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
7394 *** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
7395 the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
7397 If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
7398 FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
7399 TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
7400 obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
7402 TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
7404 FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
7405 List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
7407 A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
7409 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
7410 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
7411 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
7413 *** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
7414 of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
7416 *** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
7417 names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
7419 *** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself.
7420 If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c
7421 /tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c",
7422 "dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the file name,
7423 point will go to the beginning of the file.
7425 *** Compressed files are now transparently supported if
7426 auto-compression-mode is active. You can tag (with Etags) and search
7427 (with find-tag) both compressed and uncompressed files.
7429 *** Tags commands like M-x tags-search no longer change point
7430 in buffers where no match is found. In buffers where a match is
7431 found, the original value of point is pushed on the marker ring.
7433 ** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
7434 remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
7435 appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
7437 ** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
7439 ** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
7441 ** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
7442 containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
7443 expression from that list, are not checked.
7445 ** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
7446 When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
7447 and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
7448 the buffer, just like for the local files.
7450 ** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
7452 ** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
7453 displays local abbrevs, only.
7455 ** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
7456 paragraphs filled as you modify them.
7458 ** The variable `double-click-fuzz' specifies how much the mouse
7459 may be moved between clicks that are recognized as a pair. Its value
7460 is measured in pixels.
7462 ** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
7463 to be visited as images.
7465 ** Two new user-options `grep-command' and `grep-find-command'
7466 were added to compile.el.
7468 ** Withdrawn packages
7470 *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
7471 functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
7473 *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
7475 *** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
7478 * Incompatible Lisp changes
7480 There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and
7481 may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference.
7482 See the sections below for details.
7484 ** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom
7485 `(format "%s" foo)' no longer works to copy and remove properties.
7486 Use `copy-sequence' to copy the string, then use `set-text-properties'
7487 to remove the properties of the copy.
7489 ** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code
7490 which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability)
7491 may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from
7492 these properties are active.
7494 ** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search
7495 ranges may affect some code.
7497 ** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook
7498 buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might
7499 make a difference to some code.
7501 ** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which
7502 operates on the minibuffer.
7504 ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
7505 cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce
7506 different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters
7507 (previously, both coding systems would produce the same results).
7508 Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate
7509 character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading
7510 multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE
7511 encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program
7512 reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte
7513 sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as
7514 a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in
7515 the buffer as multibyte characters.
7517 Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal
7518 MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only
7519 appropriate for reading truly binary files.
7521 ** Code that relies on the obsolete `before-change-function' and
7522 `after-change-function' to detect buffer changes will now fail. Use
7523 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' instead.
7525 ** Code that uses `concat' with integer args now gets an error, as
7526 long promised. So does any code that uses derivatives of `concat',
7527 such as `mapconcat'.
7529 ** The function base64-decode-string now always returns a unibyte
7532 ** Not a Lisp incompatibility as such but, with the introduction of
7533 extra private charsets, there is now only one slot free for a new
7534 dimension-2 private charset. User code which tries to add more than
7535 one extra will fail unless you rebuild Emacs with some standard
7536 charset(s) removed; that is probably inadvisable because it changes
7537 the emacs-mule encoding. Also, files stored in the emacs-mule
7538 encoding using Emacs 20 with additional private charsets defined will
7539 probably not be read correctly by Emacs 21.
7541 ** The variable `directory-sep-char' is slated for removal.
7542 Not really a change (yet), but a projected one that you should be
7543 aware of: The variable `directory-sep-char' is deprecated, and should
7544 not be used. It was always ignored on GNU/Linux and Unix systems and
7545 on MS-DOS, but the MS-Windows port tried to support it by adapting the
7546 behavior of certain primitives to the value of this variable. It
7547 turned out that such support cannot be reliable, so it was decided to
7548 remove this variable in the near future. Lisp programs are well
7549 advised not to set it to anything but '/', because any different value
7550 will not have any effect when support for this variable is removed.
7553 * Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
7554 (Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
7556 ** Function assq-delete-all replaces function assoc-delete-all.
7558 ** The new function animate-string, from lisp/play/animate.el
7559 allows the animated display of strings.
7561 ** The new function `interactive-form' can be used to obtain the
7562 interactive form of a function.
7564 ** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
7565 between custom options. Example:
7567 (defcustom default-input-method nil
7568 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
7569 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
7570 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
7572 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
7573 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
7575 This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
7576 current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
7577 first in a custom-set-variables statement.
7579 ** The new hook `kbd-macro-termination-hook' is run at the end of
7580 function execute-kbd-macro. Functions on this hook are called with no
7581 args. The hook is run independent of how the macro was terminated
7582 (signal or normal termination).
7584 ** Functions `butlast' and `nbutlast' for removing trailing elements
7585 from a list are now available without requiring the CL package.
7587 ** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
7588 to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
7590 ** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
7591 alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
7593 ** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum".
7595 ** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
7596 deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
7599 ** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
7601 ** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
7602 If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
7603 skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
7604 with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
7605 C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
7608 ** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
7609 the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
7612 ** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
7613 expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
7615 ** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
7616 with the more general `:mask' property.
7618 ** Image specifications accept more `:conversion's.
7620 ** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
7623 ** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
7624 is running in batch mode. For example,
7626 (message "%s" (read t))
7628 will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
7631 ** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
7632 `kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
7634 ** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
7635 will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
7638 ** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
7641 - Function: remove ELT SEQ
7643 Return a copy of SEQ with all occurrences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
7644 a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
7646 - Function: remq ELT LIST
7648 Return a copy of LIST with all occurrences of ELT removed. The
7649 comparison is done with `eq'.
7651 ** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
7653 ** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
7654 has been changed: WEAK can now have new values `key-or-value' and
7655 `key-and-value', in addition to `nil', `key', `value', and `t'.
7657 ** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
7658 without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
7659 convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
7661 ** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
7662 or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
7664 ** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
7665 function was declared obsolete.
7667 ** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7668 retained as an alias).
7670 ** Easy-menu's :filter now takes the unconverted form of the menu and
7671 the result is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
7673 ** The new function `window-list' has been defined
7675 - Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF
7677 Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or
7678 omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use
7679 the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window,
7680 even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the
7681 minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t
7682 means never include the minibuffer window.
7684 ** There's a new function `get-window-with-predicate' defined as follows
7686 - Function: get-window-with-predicate PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
7688 Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
7690 This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
7691 calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
7692 argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
7693 value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
7696 Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
7697 if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
7698 it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
7699 minibuffer even if it is active.
7701 Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
7702 counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
7703 too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
7704 and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
7705 `walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
7706 entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
7708 ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
7709 ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
7710 ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
7711 ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
7712 ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
7713 If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
7714 Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
7716 ** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
7717 event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
7718 argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
7720 ** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
7721 call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
7722 message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
7723 Default value is nil.
7725 ** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
7728 ** The new user option `line-number-display-limit-width' controls
7729 the maximum width of lines in a buffer for which Emacs displays line
7730 numbers in the mode line. The default is 200.
7732 ** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
7733 coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
7734 DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
7736 ** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument
7737 list of a primitive.
7739 ** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
7741 ** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
7742 buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
7743 This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
7744 than replacing the local map.
7746 ** The obsolete variables `before-change-function' and
7747 `after-change-function' are no longer acted upon and have been
7748 removed. Use `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions'
7751 ** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
7753 ** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
7754 as promised long ago.
7756 ** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
7758 ** The new variable auto-coding-regexp-alist specifies coding systems
7759 for reading specific files, analogous to auto-coding-alist, but
7760 patterns are checked against file contents instead of file names.
7763 * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
7765 ** The new package rx.el provides an alternative sexp notation for
7766 regular expressions.
7768 - Function: rx-to-string SEXP
7770 Translate SEXP into a regular expression in string notation.
7774 Translate SEXP into a regular expression in string notation.
7776 The following are valid subforms of regular expressions in sexp
7780 matches string STRING literally.
7783 matches character CHAR literally.
7786 matches any character except a newline.
7789 matches any character
7792 matches any character in SET. SET may be a character or string.
7793 Ranges of characters can be specified as `A-Z' in strings.
7799 matches any character not in SET
7802 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of a line
7803 in the text being matched
7806 is similar to `line-start' but matches only at the end of a line
7809 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the
7810 string being matched against.
7813 matches the empty string, but only at the end of the
7814 string being matched against.
7817 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the
7818 buffer being matched against.
7821 matches the empty string, but only at the end of the
7822 buffer being matched against.
7825 matches the empty string, but only at point.
7828 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a
7832 matches the empty string, but only at the end of a word.
7835 matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a
7838 `(not word-boundary)'
7839 matches the empty string, but not at the beginning or end of a
7843 matches 0 through 9.
7846 matches ASCII control characters.
7849 matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
7852 matches space and tab only.
7855 matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
7859 matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
7863 matches letters and digits. (But at present, for multibyte characters,
7864 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
7867 matches letters. (But at present, for multibyte characters,
7868 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
7871 matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
7874 matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
7877 matches anything lower-case.
7880 matches anything upper-case.
7883 matches punctuation. (But at present, for multibyte characters,
7884 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
7887 matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
7890 matches anything that has word syntax.
7893 matches a character with syntax SYNTAX. SYNTAX must be one
7894 of the following symbols.
7896 `whitespace' (\\s- in string notation)
7897 `punctuation' (\\s.)
7900 `open-parenthesis' (\\s()
7901 `close-parenthesis' (\\s))
7902 `expression-prefix' (\\s')
7903 `string-quote' (\\s\")
7904 `paired-delimiter' (\\s$)
7906 `character-quote' (\\s/)
7907 `comment-start' (\\s<)
7908 `comment-end' (\\s>)
7910 `(not (syntax SYNTAX))'
7911 matches a character that has not syntax SYNTAX.
7913 `(category CATEGORY)'
7914 matches a character with category CATEGORY. CATEGORY must be
7915 either a character to use for C, or one of the following symbols.
7917 `consonant' (\\c0 in string notation)
7919 `upper-diacritical-mark' (\\c2)
7920 `lower-diacritical-mark' (\\c3)
7924 `vowel-modifying-diacritical-mark' (\\c7)
7926 `semivowel-lower' (\\c9)
7927 `not-at-end-of-line' (\\c<)
7928 `not-at-beginning-of-line' (\\c>)
7929 `alpha-numeric-two-byte' (\\cA)
7930 `chinse-two-byte' (\\cC)
7931 `greek-two-byte' (\\cG)
7932 `japanese-hiragana-two-byte' (\\cH)
7933 `indian-two-byte' (\\cI)
7934 `japanese-katakana-two-byte' (\\cK)
7935 `korean-hangul-two-byte' (\\cN)
7936 `cyrillic-two-byte' (\\cY)
7945 `japanese-katakana' (\\ck)
7949 `japanese-roman' (\\cr)
7956 `(not (category CATEGORY))'
7957 matches a character that has not category CATEGORY.
7959 `(and SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)'
7960 matches what SEXP1 matches, followed by what SEXP2 matches, etc.
7962 `(submatch SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)'
7963 like `and', but makes the match accessible with `match-end',
7964 `match-beginning', and `match-string'.
7966 `(group SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)'
7967 another name for `submatch'.
7969 `(or SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)'
7970 matches anything that matches SEXP1 or SEXP2, etc. If all
7971 args are strings, use `regexp-opt' to optimize the resulting
7974 `(minimal-match SEXP)'
7975 produce a non-greedy regexp for SEXP. Normally, regexps matching
7976 zero or more occurrences of something are \"greedy\" in that they
7977 match as much as they can, as long as the overall regexp can
7978 still match. A non-greedy regexp matches as little as possible.
7980 `(maximal-match SEXP)'
7981 produce a greedy regexp for SEXP. This is the default.
7983 `(zero-or-more SEXP)'
7984 matches zero or more occurrences of what SEXP matches.
7987 like `zero-or-more'.
7990 like `zero-or-more', but always produces a greedy regexp.
7993 like `zero-or-more', but always produces a non-greedy regexp.
7995 `(one-or-more SEXP)'
7996 matches one or more occurrences of A.
8002 like `one-or-more', but always produces a greedy regexp.
8005 like `one-or-more', but always produces a non-greedy regexp.
8007 `(zero-or-one SEXP)'
8008 matches zero or one occurrences of A.
8014 like `zero-or-one', but always produces a greedy regexp.
8017 like `zero-or-one', but always produces a non-greedy regexp.
8020 matches N occurrences of what SEXP matches.
8023 matches N to M occurrences of what SEXP matches.
8026 evaluate FORM and insert result. If result is a string,
8030 include REGEXP in string notation in the result.
8032 *** The features `md5' and `overlay' are now provided by default.
8034 *** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
8035 buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
8036 the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
8037 restriction to be restored incorrectly.
8039 *** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
8040 `eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
8041 when they find 8-bit characters. Previously, they included `ascii' in a
8042 multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
8044 *** The functions `set-buffer-multibyte', `string-as-multibyte' and
8045 `string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer or a string
8046 if it contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
8048 *** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
8049 changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
8050 [\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
8051 regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
8052 the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
8053 extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
8054 bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
8057 ** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
8059 A fontset can now be specified for each independent character, for
8060 a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
8061 character set as previously.
8063 *** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
8064 They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
8065 modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
8067 CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
8068 characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
8069 range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
8070 case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
8072 FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
8073 name of a font and REGISTRY is a registry name of a font.
8075 *** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
8076 registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
8079 *** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
8080 argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
8082 ** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
8083 composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
8084 buffers and strings.
8086 *** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
8087 character' which is an independent character with a unique character
8088 code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
8089 have been deleted: composite-char-component,
8090 composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
8091 composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
8092 The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
8095 *** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
8096 specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
8097 `reference-point-alist' for more detail.
8099 *** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
8100 MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
8101 composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
8102 may differ between buffer and string text.
8104 *** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
8105 COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
8107 *** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
8108 directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
8109 Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
8110 `composition' from STRING.
8112 *** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
8113 a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
8115 *** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
8118 ** The new coding system `mac-roman' is primarily intended for use on
8119 the Macintosh but may be used generally for Macintosh-encoded text.
8121 ** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
8122 `mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' have been
8123 introduced for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF,
8124 U+2500..U+33FF, U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
8126 Note that the character sets are not yet unified in Emacs, so
8127 characters which belong to charsets such as Latin-2, Greek, Hebrew,
8128 etc. and the same characters in the `mule-unicode-*' charsets are
8129 different characters, as far as Emacs is concerned. For example, text
8130 which includes Unicode characters from the Latin-2 locale cannot be
8131 encoded by Emacs with ISO 8859-2 coding system.
8133 ** The new coding system `mule-utf-8' has been added.
8134 It provides limited support for decoding/encoding UTF-8 text. For
8135 details, please see the documentation string of this coding system.
8137 ** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
8138 `japanese-jisx0213-2' have been introduced for the new Japanese
8139 standard JIS X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
8141 ** The new character sets `latin-iso8859-14' and `latin-iso8859-15'
8142 have been introduced.
8144 ** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
8145 have been introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
8146 0xA0..0xFF respectively. Note that the multibyte representation of
8147 eight-bit-control is never exposed; this leads to an exception in the
8148 emacs-mule coding system, which encodes everything else to the
8149 buffer/string internal representation. Note that to search for
8150 eight-bit-graphic characters in a multibyte buffer, the search string
8151 must be multibyte, otherwise such characters will be converted to
8152 their multibyte equivalent.
8154 ** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
8155 that offset in the file before writing.
8157 ** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
8158 compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
8160 ** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
8161 `*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
8162 from which the command was issued.
8164 ** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
8165 `query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
8166 `replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
8167 additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
8170 ** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
8171 to `window-buffer-height'.
8173 - Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
8175 Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
8176 The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
8177 lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
8179 Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
8182 If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optional third argument
8183 COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
8185 The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
8186 obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
8187 on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
8189 Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
8190 buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
8191 possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
8192 is currently displayed in some window.
8194 ** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
8195 argument function's results.
8197 ** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
8198 signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails. Also,
8199 `base64-decode-string' now always returns a unibyte string (in Emacs
8200 20, it returned a multibyte string when the result was a valid multibyte
8203 ** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
8204 header in the list of headers passed to it.
8206 ** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
8207 ignores differences in case and text representation.
8209 ** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
8210 cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
8213 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
8214 nil don't display a cursor
8215 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
8216 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
8217 others display a box cursor.
8219 ** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
8220 an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
8221 defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
8222 set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
8224 ** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
8225 specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
8226 the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
8227 text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
8231 (string-to-syntax "()")
8234 ** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
8237 *** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
8238 INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
8245 *** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
8250 *** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
8255 *** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
8262 ** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
8263 the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
8266 ** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
8267 a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
8268 value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
8269 not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
8271 ** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
8273 ** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
8274 for a regexp in a string.
8276 ** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
8277 `mouse-position-function'.
8279 ** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
8280 that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
8282 ** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
8283 Keywords are now always considered constants.
8285 ** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
8288 ** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
8289 returned by function `recent-keys'.
8291 ** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
8292 can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
8293 Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding C-M-a
8294 etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
8297 ** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
8298 and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
8300 ** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
8301 has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
8302 function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
8303 returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
8306 When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
8307 and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
8308 hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
8309 then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
8311 ** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
8312 In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
8313 and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
8315 ** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
8316 with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
8319 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
8321 Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
8322 TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
8323 saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
8326 ** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
8327 Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8328 Also back-references like \2 are now considered as an error if the
8329 corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet).
8330 Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\').
8332 ** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
8333 removed since it wasn't used by anything.
8335 ** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
8336 instead of being optional.
8338 ** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
8339 modify read-only text.
8341 ** New functions and variables for locales.
8343 The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
8344 decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
8345 time functions like strftime. The new variables
8346 `system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
8347 locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
8349 The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
8350 environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
8351 the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
8352 environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
8353 not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
8354 `locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
8355 `locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
8357 ** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
8358 To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
8359 modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
8362 ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
8363 because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
8365 ** New function `propertize'
8367 The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
8368 strings with text properties.
8370 - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
8372 Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
8373 by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
8374 PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
8375 specified value of that property. Example:
8377 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
8379 ** push and pop macros.
8381 Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
8382 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
8383 as the place that holds the list to be changed.
8385 (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
8386 (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
8387 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
8389 ** New dolist and dotimes macros.
8391 Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
8392 are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
8394 (dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
8395 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
8396 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
8397 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
8399 (dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
8400 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
8401 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
8402 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
8404 ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as
8405 [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character
8406 class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period
8409 [:digit:] matches 0 through 9
8410 [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
8411 [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
8412 [:blank:] matches space and tab only
8413 [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
8415 [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
8417 [:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
8418 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
8419 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
8420 [:alpha:] matches letters.
8421 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
8422 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
8423 [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
8424 [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
8425 [:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
8426 [:punct:] matches punctuation.
8427 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
8428 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
8429 [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
8430 [:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
8431 [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
8433 ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
8435 The following functions are defined for hash tables:
8437 - Function: make-hash-table ARGS
8439 The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
8440 are optional. The following arguments are defined:
8444 TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
8445 Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
8446 it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
8450 SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
8451 many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
8453 :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
8455 REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
8456 full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
8457 size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
8458 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
8459 old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
8461 :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
8463 THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
8464 hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
8465 (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
8469 WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
8470 `key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
8471 `key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
8472 collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
8473 outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
8475 - Function: makehash &optional TEST
8477 Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
8479 - Function: hash-table-p TABLE
8481 Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
8483 - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
8485 Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
8488 - Function: hash-table-count TABLE
8490 Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
8492 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
8494 Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
8496 - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
8498 Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
8500 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
8502 Returns the size of TABLE.
8504 - Function: hash-table-test TABLE
8506 Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
8508 - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
8510 Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
8512 - Function: clrhash TABLE
8516 - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
8518 Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
8521 - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
8523 Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
8524 another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
8526 - Function: remhash KEY TABLE
8528 Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
8530 - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
8532 Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
8533 arguments KEY and VALUE.
8535 - Function: sxhash OBJ
8537 Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
8539 - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
8541 Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
8542 a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
8543 comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
8544 and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
8545 of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
8547 TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
8549 HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
8550 code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
8551 integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
8553 Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
8554 be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
8556 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
8557 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
8559 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
8560 (sxhash (upcase a)))
8562 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
8563 'case-fold-string-hash))
8565 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
8567 ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
8569 It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
8570 circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
8571 a cons cell which is its own cdr.
8573 ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
8575 If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
8576 #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
8578 ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
8579 t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
8580 specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
8581 is too short to reach that column.
8583 ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
8584 now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
8585 after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
8586 two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
8588 If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
8589 perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
8590 and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
8592 ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
8593 to specify which buffer to return the size of.
8595 ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
8596 calendar-move-hook after moving point.
8598 ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
8599 directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
8600 small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
8601 small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
8602 temporary-file-directory instead.
8604 ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
8605 the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
8606 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
8607 hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
8609 ** assq-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
8610 elements of an alist which have a car `eq' to a particular value.
8612 ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
8614 make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
8615 creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
8616 ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
8618 ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
8620 The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
8621 on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
8622 is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
8623 never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
8624 ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
8625 overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
8627 If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
8628 that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
8629 to get an error if the file exists at that time.
8630 The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
8632 ** Function `format' now handles text properties.
8634 Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
8635 If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
8636 ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
8639 Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
8640 string where arguments appear in the result string.
8644 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
8646 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
8647 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
8650 results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
8652 ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
8654 Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
8655 The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
8658 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
8660 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
8661 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
8666 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
8667 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
8669 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
8670 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
8671 to enable sound support.
8673 Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
8674 list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
8675 when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
8676 functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
8677 sound to play, before playing the sound.
8679 The following sound properties are supported:
8683 FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
8684 searched relative to `data-directory'.
8688 DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
8689 may be present, but not both.
8693 VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
8694 0..1. This property is optional.
8698 DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the
8699 sound. The default device is system-dependent.
8701 Other properties are ignored.
8703 An alternative interface is called as
8704 (play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE).
8706 ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
8708 ** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
8711 ** Changes to garbage collection
8713 *** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
8714 of live and free strings.
8716 *** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
8717 strings that have been consed so far.
8720 * Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
8723 ** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
8726 ** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third optional
8727 argument, PARTIALLY. If a character is only partially visible, nil is
8728 returned, unless PARTIALLY is non-nil.
8730 ** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
8732 ** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
8734 ** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
8737 - Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
8739 Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
8741 SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
8742 measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
8743 character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
8744 font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
8745 FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
8747 ** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
8750 - Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
8752 Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
8753 FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
8754 or omitted means use the selected frame.
8756 ** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
8757 satisfying one of a list of specifications.
8759 ** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
8762 ** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
8766 * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
8768 ** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
8769 to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
8771 Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
8772 text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
8773 is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
8774 your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
8775 laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
8776 just display it black instead.
8778 This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
8781 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
8785 ** New face implementation.
8787 Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
8788 font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
8792 Each face can specify the following display attributes:
8794 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
8796 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
8797 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
8799 3. Font height in 1/10pt
8801 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
8803 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
8805 6. Foreground color.
8807 7. Background color.
8809 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
8811 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
8813 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
8815 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
8817 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
8820 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
8821 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
8823 Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
8824 same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
8825 frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
8826 faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
8827 with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each of the face
8828 attributes mentioned above.
8830 There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
8831 definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
8834 A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
8835 have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
8840 The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
8841 combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
8842 aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
8843 properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
8844 that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
8845 results in a fully-specified face.
8847 *** Face realization.
8849 After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
8850 merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
8851 realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
8852 available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
8853 face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
8854 cache of the frame on which it was realized.
8856 Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
8857 character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
8858 for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
8859 charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
8861 Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
8862 specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
8863 being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
8864 the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
8865 statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
8867 In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
8868 `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
8869 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
8870 the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
8871 initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
8874 Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
8875 `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
8876 registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
8877 with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
8879 **** Clearing face caches.
8881 The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
8882 on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
8887 Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
8888 given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
8889 for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
8891 If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
8892 pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
8893 family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
8894 property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
8895 an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
8897 Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
8898 against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
8899 match for the given face attributes in this font list.
8901 Font selection can be influenced by the user.
8903 The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
8904 attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
8905 face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
8906 names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
8907 that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
8908 width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
8909 to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
8911 Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
8912 alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
8915 Setting `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows the user to specify
8916 all alternative font registry names to try for a face specifying a
8919 Please note that the interpretations of the above two variables are
8922 Setting face-ignored-fonts allows the user to ignore specific fonts.
8927 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
8928 since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
8931 To enable scalable font use, set the variable
8932 `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
8933 scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
8934 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
8935 scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
8938 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
8940 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
8942 *** Functions and variables related to font selection.
8944 - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
8946 Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
8947 is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
8948 string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
8950 If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
8951 the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
8952 FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
8953 POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
8954 SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
8955 These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
8956 if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
8957 REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
8958 the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
8959 of the face font sort order.
8961 - Function: x-font-family-list
8963 Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
8964 omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
8965 (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
8966 non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
8968 - Variable: font-list-limit
8970 Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
8971 won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
8972 matching font. The default is currently 100.
8974 *** Setting face attributes.
8976 For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
8977 with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
8978 implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
8981 Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
8982 symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
8984 The following attributes are recognized:
8988 VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
8989 or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
8990 and `?' are allowed.
8994 VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
8995 It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
8996 `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
8997 `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
9001 VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
9002 in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
9003 scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
9004 height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
9008 VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
9009 symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
9010 `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
9014 VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
9015 symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
9018 `:foreground', `:background'
9020 VALUE must be a color name, a string.
9024 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
9025 VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
9026 a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
9031 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
9032 VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
9033 string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
9038 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
9039 striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
9040 face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
9041 is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
9045 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
9046 around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
9047 VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
9048 of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
9049 and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
9050 VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
9051 :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
9052 the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
9053 specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
9054 defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
9055 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
9056 color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
9057 should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
9058 like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
9059 that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
9060 the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
9065 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
9066 inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
9070 If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
9071 The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
9072 searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
9073 HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
9074 is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
9075 explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
9077 For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
9078 and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
9082 Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
9083 XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
9084 is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
9087 For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
9088 be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
9089 must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
9091 Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
9096 VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
9097 of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
9098 like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
9100 *** Face attributes and X resources
9102 The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
9105 Face attribute X resource class
9106 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
9107 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
9108 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
9109 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
9110 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
9111 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
9112 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
9113 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
9114 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
9115 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
9116 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
9117 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
9118 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
9119 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
9120 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
9121 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
9122 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
9123 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
9124 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
9125 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
9127 *** Text property `face'.
9129 The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
9130 specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
9131 specification can be
9133 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
9135 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
9136 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
9137 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
9138 for face attribute names.
9140 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
9141 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
9142 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
9144 ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
9146 The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
9147 on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
9148 the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
9149 default. You can get defined colors with a call to
9150 `defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
9151 used to clear the mapping table.
9153 ** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
9155 The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
9156 and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
9157 type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
9158 color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
9159 display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
9160 old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
9161 `x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
9162 compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
9163 should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
9164 modify their color-related behavior.
9166 The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
9169 ** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
9171 The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
9172 `display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
9173 `display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
9174 `display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
9175 `display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
9176 `display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
9177 display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
9178 the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
9179 platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
9181 The new function `display-images-p' returns non-nil if a particular
9182 display can display image files.
9184 ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
9186 This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
9187 To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize
9188 the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the
9189 `Inviolable' option.
9191 The function `minibuffer-prompt-end' returns the current position of the
9192 end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
9193 Otherwise, it returns `(point-min)'.
9195 ** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
9197 There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
9198 buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
9199 property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
9201 Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
9202 forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9203 to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
9204 not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
9205 commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
9206 boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
9207 `inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
9210 Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9211 a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
9212 editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
9214 The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
9216 - Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9218 Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
9220 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
9221 If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
9222 constrained position if that is different.
9224 If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
9225 positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
9226 ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
9227 constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9228 as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
9229 is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
9230 fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
9231 the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
9232 also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9234 If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
9235 NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
9236 unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
9237 C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
9238 only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
9240 If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
9241 a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
9243 Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
9245 - Function: delete-field &optional POS
9247 Delete the field surrounding POS.
9248 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
9249 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9251 - Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
9253 Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
9254 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
9255 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9256 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9257 field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
9259 - Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
9261 Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
9262 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
9263 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9264 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9265 then the end of the *following* field is returned.
9267 - Function: field-string &optional POS
9269 Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
9270 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
9271 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9273 - Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
9275 Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
9276 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
9277 If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9281 Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
9282 strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
9283 (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
9284 replaces the display of the characters having that property.
9286 If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
9287 `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
9288 AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
9289 window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
9292 IMAGE is an image specification.
9294 *** Image specifications
9296 Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
9297 is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
9298 specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
9299 symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
9300 described below are ignored.
9302 The following is a list of properties all image types share.
9306 ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
9307 If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
9308 to use for its ascent.
9310 If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
9311 image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
9313 If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
9314 centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
9315 of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
9316 overlays that apply to the image.
9320 MARGIN must be either a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put
9321 as margin around the image, or a pair (X . Y) with X specifying the
9322 horizontal margin and Y specifying the vertical margin. Default is 0.
9326 RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
9331 Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
9333 ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
9334 edge-detection algorithm to the image.
9336 ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
9337 apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
9338 nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
9339 position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
9340 around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
9341 neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
9342 transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
9343 x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
9346 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
9348 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
9350 The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
9351 resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
9352 multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
9353 of the factors' absolute values.
9355 Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
9361 Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
9367 ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
9372 If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
9373 the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
9374 image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
9375 background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
9376 image, assuming the most frequently occurring color from the corners is
9377 the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
9378 GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
9381 If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
9382 in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
9387 Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
9388 search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
9389 building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
9390 may be present in the image specification.
9394 Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
9395 supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
9396 present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
9397 support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
9399 *** Supported image types
9401 **** XBM, image type `xbm'.
9403 XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
9404 properties supported are:
9408 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil
9409 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground color.
9413 BG must be a string specifying the image background color, or nil
9414 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color.
9416 XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
9417 case, the image specification must contain the following properties
9418 instead of a `:file' property.
9422 WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
9426 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
9432 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
9433 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
9435 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
9437 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
9440 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
9441 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
9444 **** XPM, image type `xpm'
9446 XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
9447 `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
9448 found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
9449 `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
9451 Additional image properties supported are:
9453 `:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
9455 SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
9456 name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
9459 XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
9460 add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
9462 The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
9463 to display compressed images.
9465 **** PBM, image type `pbm'
9467 PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
9468 mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
9473 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil
9474 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground color.
9478 BG must be a string specifying the image background color, or nil
9479 meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color.
9481 **** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
9483 Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
9484 package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
9487 **** TIFF, image type `tiff'
9489 Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
9490 package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
9493 **** GIF, image type `gif'
9495 Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
9496 `libungif-4.1.0', or later.
9498 Additional image properties supported are:
9502 INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
9503 multi-image GIF file. If INDEX is too large, the image displays
9506 This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
9507 For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
9508 at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
9511 (defun show-anim (file max)
9512 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
9513 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
9515 (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
9518 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
9521 (goto-char (point-min))
9522 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
9523 (insert-image img "x"))
9524 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
9526 **** PNG, image type `png'
9528 Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
9529 package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
9532 **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
9534 Additional image properties supported are:
9538 WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
9539 integer. This is a required property.
9543 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
9544 must be a integer. This is an required property.
9548 BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
9549 the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
9550 files. This is an required property.
9552 Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
9557 The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
9558 which are supported in the current configuration.
9560 Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
9561 they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
9562 The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
9563 manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
9564 images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
9566 *** Simplified image API, image.el
9568 The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
9569 creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
9570 can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
9571 define an image based on available image types. The functions
9572 `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
9577 Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
9580 To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
9581 `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
9582 `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
9583 obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
9584 `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
9585 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
9586 of the display margins.
9588 You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
9589 containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
9590 one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
9591 string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
9596 Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
9597 moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
9598 `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
9599 that have a `help-echo' property.
9601 If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
9602 is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
9603 the window in which the help was found.
9605 If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
9606 `help-echo' text property was found.
9608 If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
9609 POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
9611 If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
9612 the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
9615 If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
9616 string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
9618 For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
9619 determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
9620 property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
9621 For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
9622 used as help string.
9624 The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
9625 the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
9626 causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
9628 ** Vertical fractional scrolling.
9630 The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
9631 This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
9633 The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
9634 scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
9635 The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
9636 scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
9639 (global-set-key [A-down]
9642 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
9643 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
9644 (global-set-key [A-up]
9647 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
9648 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
9650 ** New hook `fontification-functions'.
9652 Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
9653 when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
9654 variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
9655 is called with one argument, POS.
9657 At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
9658 characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
9659 as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
9660 property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
9661 `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
9663 ** Tool bar support.
9665 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
9666 parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
9667 controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
9668 suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
9669 `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
9670 automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
9672 *** Tool bar item definitions
9674 Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
9675 `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
9676 where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
9678 CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
9679 evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
9680 the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
9681 property (see below).
9683 BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
9684 binding are currently ignored.
9686 The following properties are recognized:
9690 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
9695 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
9699 FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
9700 FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
9701 used instead of BINDING to display this item.
9703 `:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
9705 TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
9706 and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
9710 IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
9711 image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
9712 meaning of each of the four elements:
9714 Index Use when item is
9715 ----------------------------------------
9716 0 enabled and selected
9717 1 enabled and deselected
9718 2 disabled and selected
9719 3 disabled and deselected
9721 If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
9722 algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
9724 `:help HELP-STRING'.
9726 Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
9727 is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
9729 The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
9730 toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
9731 to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
9734 The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
9735 dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
9736 buffer-locally to override the global map.
9738 *** Tool-bar-related variables.
9740 If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
9741 resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
9742 than 1/4 of the frame's size.
9744 If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
9745 raised when the mouse moves over them.
9747 You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
9748 `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
9749 pixels, or a pair of integers (X . Y) specifying horizontal and
9750 vertical margins . Default is 1.
9752 You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
9753 `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
9755 *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
9757 You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
9760 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
9761 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
9762 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
9764 is the original tool bar item definition, then
9766 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
9768 makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
9771 ** Mode line changes.
9773 *** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
9775 The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
9776 that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
9777 a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
9779 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
9780 a `local-map' text property.
9782 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
9783 that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
9785 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
9786 is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
9787 `local-map' property.
9789 The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
9790 properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
9793 *** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
9794 evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
9796 *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
9797 variable mode-line-format to nil.
9799 *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
9801 This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
9802 `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
9803 completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
9804 `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
9807 The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
9810 The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
9811 position in the header-line.
9813 ** Text property `display'
9815 The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
9816 replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
9817 also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
9818 the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
9819 below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
9821 *** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
9823 To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
9824 text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
9826 If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
9827 marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
9828 the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
9829 is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
9830 simpler form STRING as property value.
9832 *** Variable width and height spaces
9834 To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
9835 specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
9836 `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
9837 area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
9838 marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
9839 displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
9840 simpler form STRETCH as property value.
9842 The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
9843 PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
9844 properties described below.
9846 The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
9847 characters having the `display' property.
9851 Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
9852 character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
9854 - :relative-width FACTOR
9856 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
9857 first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
9858 same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
9859 width of that character by FACTOR.
9863 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
9864 value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
9866 Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
9870 Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
9873 - :relative-height FACTOR
9875 The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
9876 of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
9880 Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
9881 used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
9882 baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
9885 You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
9889 A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
9890 . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
9891 in the display, the characters having this display specification in
9892 their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
9893 the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
9894 `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
9895 area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
9896 the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
9897 as display specification.
9899 *** Other display properties
9901 - (space-width FACTOR)
9903 Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
9904 should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
9909 Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
9911 If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
9912 means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
9913 the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
9914 ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
9915 a font is available counts as a step.
9917 If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
9918 as tall as the frame's default font.
9920 If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
9921 height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
9923 Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
9924 `height' bound to the current specified font height.
9928 FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
9929 font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
9930 raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
9931 amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
9932 `height' subproperty.
9934 *** Conditional display properties
9936 All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
9937 has the form `(when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC applies
9938 only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated. During the
9939 evaluation, `object' is bound to the string or buffer having the
9940 conditional display property; `position' and `buffer-position' are
9941 bound to the position within `object' and the buffer position where
9942 the display property was found, respectively. Both positions can be
9943 different when object is a string.
9945 The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
9948 ** New menu separator types.
9950 Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
9951 item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
9952 treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
9953 to specify other menu separator types.
9955 - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
9957 No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
9960 - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
9962 A single line in the menu's foreground color.
9964 - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
9966 A double line in the menu's foreground color.
9968 - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
9970 A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
9972 - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
9974 A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
9976 - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
9978 A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the form
9979 displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
9981 - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
9983 A single line with 3D raised appearance.
9985 - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
9987 A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
9989 - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
9991 A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
9993 - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
9995 Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
9997 - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
9999 Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
10001 - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
10003 Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
10005 - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
10007 Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
10009 Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
10010 the corresponding single-line separators.
10012 ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
10014 The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
10015 `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
10016 Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
10017 that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
10018 default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
10019 default background is the background color of the frame, and the
10020 default foreground is black.
10022 The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
10023 (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
10024 `ScrollBarBackground').
10026 Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
10027 settings for scroll bar colors.
10029 ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
10030 display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
10032 ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
10033 starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
10034 on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
10035 line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
10036 the original window start.
10038 ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
10039 `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
10040 now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
10042 ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
10044 A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
10045 `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
10046 windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
10047 other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
10049 The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
10050 fixed-width and fixed-height.
10052 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
10054 A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
10055 fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
10056 window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
10057 change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
10058 temporarily to nil, for example
10060 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
10061 (enlarge-window 10))
10063 Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
10064 or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
10066 ** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
10067 terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
10068 to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
10069 overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
10070 horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
10071 support a vertical-bar cursor).
10075 * Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
10077 ** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
10080 ** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
10082 ** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
10084 ** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
10085 only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
10086 exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
10087 (e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
10088 (e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
10090 ** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
10094 * Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
10096 ** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
10100 * Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
10102 ** Not new, but not mentioned before:
10103 M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
10105 * Changes in Emacs 20.4
10107 ** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
10109 You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
10110 Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
10111 `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
10113 If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
10114 is the one that is used.
10116 ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
10117 the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
10118 Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
10119 separate from the command's regular output.
10120 Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
10121 says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
10122 In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
10125 When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
10126 output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
10127 it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
10128 cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
10130 ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
10131 the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
10132 is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
10133 created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
10135 ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
10136 example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
10137 match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
10138 quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
10140 ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
10141 now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
10142 if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
10143 they never ignore case.
10145 ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
10146 under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
10147 applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
10148 of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
10149 just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
10150 convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
10151 part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
10153 If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
10154 the same format that was used in the file before.
10156 You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
10157 `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
10159 ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
10160 renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
10161 This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
10163 ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
10164 The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
10165 buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
10166 your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
10167 is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
10168 end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
10169 Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
10171 The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
10172 eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
10173 control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
10174 format. You can now customize these variables.
10176 ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
10177 filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
10178 filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
10179 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
10181 ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
10182 in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
10183 windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
10185 ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
10186 dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
10187 doesn't have any effect.
10189 ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
10190 not one per buffer.
10192 ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
10193 use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
10194 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
10196 ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
10197 To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
10198 `auto-show-mode' command.
10200 ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
10201 avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
10202 versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
10203 choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
10204 occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
10206 ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
10207 cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
10209 ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
10210 character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
10211 feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
10213 ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
10214 the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
10215 interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
10216 and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
10218 ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
10220 The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
10221 that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
10222 one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
10223 codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
10224 set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
10226 Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
10227 from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
10229 IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
10230 equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
10231 a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
10232 `?' on other systems.
10234 IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
10235 feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
10238 Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
10239 current codepage when it starts.
10243 *** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
10244 `mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
10245 appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
10246 non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
10247 MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
10248 headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
10252 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
10253 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
10255 *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
10256 default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
10257 default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
10258 sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
10259 buffer-file-coding-system.
10261 You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
10262 sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
10265 *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
10266 if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
10267 Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
10268 list of possible coding systems.
10272 *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
10273 modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
10274 longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
10275 docstring for details.
10277 *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
10278 symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
10279 found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
10280 prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
10281 lineup functions use this feature currently.
10283 *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
10284 "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
10286 *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
10287 "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
10289 *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
10290 from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
10291 symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
10292 c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
10295 *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
10296 syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
10298 *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
10299 inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
10300 support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
10301 function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
10303 *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
10304 (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
10305 brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
10306 c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
10307 (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
10309 *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
10311 *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
10313 *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
10314 for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
10316 *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
10318 *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
10319 associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
10320 This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
10321 circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
10322 class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
10326 *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
10327 added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
10328 Gnus manual for the full story.
10330 *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
10331 before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
10332 group, which is created automatically.
10334 *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
10337 *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
10339 *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
10340 outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
10342 *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
10345 *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
10347 *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
10348 re-highlighting of the article buffer.
10350 *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
10352 *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
10353 Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
10355 *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
10356 `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
10358 *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
10359 control over simplification.
10361 *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
10363 *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
10366 *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
10368 *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
10370 *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
10371 If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
10372 rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
10374 *** Canceling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
10375 `a' forces normal posting method.
10377 *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
10380 *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
10381 to a non-nil value.
10383 *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
10384 where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
10386 *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
10389 *** A history of where mails have been split is available.
10391 *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
10393 *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
10394 `gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
10396 *** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
10397 `message-cite-original-without-signature'.
10399 *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
10401 *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
10404 *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
10405 `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
10407 *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
10408 updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
10410 *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
10412 *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
10414 *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
10416 ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
10418 *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
10419 options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
10420 nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
10422 *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
10423 TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
10424 of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
10425 TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
10426 can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
10428 *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
10429 All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
10430 but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
10431 the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
10433 *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
10434 the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
10435 buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
10438 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
10440 *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
10441 file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
10443 *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
10444 lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
10445 characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
10446 removed from the label.
10448 *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
10449 a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
10451 *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
10452 customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
10454 *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
10455 `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
10458 *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
10460 ** New/deleted modes and packages
10462 *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
10463 SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
10465 *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
10466 editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
10467 SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
10469 *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
10470 changes with a special face.
10472 *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
10473 this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
10474 Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
10476 * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
10478 ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
10479 This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
10480 conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
10481 and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
10482 check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
10484 The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
10485 Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
10486 distribution when the config.bat script is run.
10488 ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
10489 MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
10490 controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
10491 directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
10492 Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
10493 on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
10494 string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
10495 program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
10496 printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
10498 ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
10499 output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
10500 available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
10501 input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
10502 temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
10505 An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
10506 and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
10507 programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
10508 automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
10509 as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
10510 ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
10512 ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
10513 a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
10514 MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
10515 was not documented clearly before.
10517 ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
10518 This includes Tetris and Snake.
10520 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
10522 ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
10523 return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
10524 They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
10525 meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
10527 ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
10528 WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
10529 and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
10531 ** Changes in the file-attributes function.
10533 *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
10534 It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
10536 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
10537 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
10540 ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
10541 files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
10542 arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
10543 file names and attributes are returned.
10545 ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
10546 sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
10547 accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its attributes.
10548 It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
10549 returns the result.
10551 ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
10552 to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
10554 ** New functions for base64 conversion:
10556 The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
10557 into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
10558 performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
10561 Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
10562 job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
10565 The new function process-running-child-p
10566 will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
10567 terminal to its own child process.
10569 ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
10570 when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
10571 to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
10572 itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
10574 ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
10575 be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
10577 ** easymenu.el now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
10578 :included is an alias for :visible.
10580 easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
10581 easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
10582 to move or copy menu entries.
10584 ** Multibyte editing changes
10586 *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
10587 an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
10588 make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
10589 work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
10590 char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
10591 (setq char (sref str idx)
10592 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
10593 The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
10595 If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
10596 (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
10597 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
10599 *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
10600 region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
10601 deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
10603 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibited
10605 This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
10606 across the boundary.
10608 *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
10609 `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
10610 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
10611 contains 8-bit characters.
10612 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
10613 contains invalid characters.
10615 *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
10616 text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
10617 preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
10618 text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
10621 *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
10622 If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
10623 end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
10624 prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
10626 *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
10627 compose Thai characters in a string.
10629 ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
10630 argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
10631 for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
10632 menus should always use the third argument.
10634 ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
10635 read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
10636 arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
10637 input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
10639 ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
10640 of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
10641 programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
10642 inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
10644 ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
10645 the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
10646 returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
10647 echo area contents.
10649 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
10651 ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
10652 NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
10653 requested feature cannot be loaded.
10655 ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
10656 foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
10657 means to clear out that attribute.
10659 ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
10660 gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
10662 ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
10663 read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
10664 unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
10665 end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
10667 ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
10668 the gap of the current buffer.
10670 ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
10671 to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
10674 ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
10675 facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
10676 These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
10677 it back in after any modifications have been made.
10679 * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
10681 ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
10682 the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
10683 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
10684 directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
10685 subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
10687 Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
10688 names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
10689 Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
10690 which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
10691 these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
10693 Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
10694 starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
10695 time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
10697 This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
10698 Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
10699 to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
10700 subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
10701 `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
10704 ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
10705 GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
10706 that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
10707 fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
10709 * Changes in Emacs 20.3
10711 ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
10712 including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
10713 it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
10714 perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
10716 ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
10717 specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
10718 region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
10719 further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
10720 command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
10721 within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
10722 are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
10725 In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
10728 ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
10729 unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
10730 buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
10731 effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
10732 Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
10734 The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
10735 though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
10736 -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
10737 load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
10739 ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
10740 no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
10741 enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
10742 something that most users not do.
10744 ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
10745 operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
10746 The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
10749 C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
10750 pasting operations.
10752 ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
10753 setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
10754 like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
10755 printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
10758 ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
10759 minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
10760 any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
10761 except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
10762 incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
10765 Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
10766 Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
10767 to be confused by TeX commands.
10769 You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
10770 correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
10771 clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
10772 of various alternative replacements and actions.
10774 Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
10775 the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
10776 corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
10777 alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
10778 flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
10780 Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
10781 flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
10783 ** Changes in input method usage.
10785 Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
10786 the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
10789 You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
10791 If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
10792 of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
10794 The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
10795 that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
10797 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
10799 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
10801 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
10802 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
10804 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
10805 given in the following case:
10806 o When you are using a complex input method.
10807 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
10809 If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
10810 input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
10811 and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
10812 setting it to t is helpful.
10814 The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
10816 In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
10818 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
10819 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
10820 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
10821 These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
10824 ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
10825 names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
10826 minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
10829 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
10831 which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
10833 Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
10834 Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
10836 ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
10837 at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
10838 its owner and group.
10840 ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
10841 Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
10843 ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
10844 contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
10846 ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
10847 which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
10848 in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
10849 by the left edge of the rectangle.
10851 ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
10852 increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
10853 C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
10854 for writing keyboard macros.
10856 ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
10857 files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
10858 frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
10859 the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
10860 additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
10863 ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
10865 ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
10866 query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
10869 ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
10870 confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
10871 the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
10872 says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
10874 ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
10875 non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
10876 literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
10878 ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
10879 now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
10880 Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
10881 inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
10883 ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
10884 failure if the command produces no output.
10886 ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
10887 manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
10890 ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
10891 mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
10892 function and variable names.
10894 ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
10895 reading specific files. This has higher priority than
10896 file-coding-system-alist.
10898 ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
10899 t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
10900 converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
10901 the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
10902 according to the current fontset.
10904 ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
10906 The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
10907 that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
10908 nonascii-insert-offset.
10910 For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
10911 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
10912 nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
10913 characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
10915 ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
10916 an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
10918 ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
10919 letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
10921 ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
10922 are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
10925 ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
10926 user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
10928 Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
10929 user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
10930 all variables that have documentation.
10932 ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
10933 shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
10934 that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
10935 minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
10936 it should show; the default is 20.
10938 Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
10939 the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
10942 ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
10943 all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
10944 recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
10945 argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
10946 the customizable options which were changed since that version.
10947 Newly added options are included as well.
10949 If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
10950 then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
10951 for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
10953 This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
10956 ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
10957 the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
10959 ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
10960 buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
10963 ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
10964 that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
10967 ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
10968 syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
10969 new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
10970 (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
10973 ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
10975 ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
10976 value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
10977 two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
10979 ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
10980 reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
10981 for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
10986 *** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
10987 the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
10989 *** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
10990 and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
10992 ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
10993 read and post multi-lingual articles.
10995 ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
10996 doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
10997 be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
10998 outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
10999 the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
11000 made invisible again.
11002 ** Mail reading and sending changes
11004 *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
11005 the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
11006 changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
11009 *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
11010 now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
11011 summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
11012 the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
11013 rmail-default-body-file.
11015 *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
11016 longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
11017 handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
11019 *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
11020 it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
11021 is evaluated to insert the signature.
11023 *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
11024 outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
11025 handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
11026 putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
11027 transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
11028 especially interested in trying feedmail.
11030 feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
11031 feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
11032 provided by feedmail are:
11034 **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
11035 stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
11036 there is also a queue for draft messages
11038 **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
11039 be prompted for confirmation
11041 **** does smart filling of address headers
11043 **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
11044 the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
11045 can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
11047 **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
11048 the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
11049 /usr/lib/sendmail, and Emacs Lisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
11050 function for something else (10-20 lines of Lisp code).
11054 *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
11055 files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
11057 *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
11058 run Dired on the directory name at point.
11060 *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
11061 files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
11062 for a specified regexp.
11066 *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
11069 *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
11070 faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
11073 VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
11074 directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
11075 listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
11076 currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
11078 You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
11079 then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
11080 vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
11081 control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
11082 on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
11084 All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
11085 is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
11086 `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
11087 the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
11088 `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
11090 The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
11091 toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
11092 VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
11093 `* l', to mark all files currently locked.
11095 Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
11096 ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
11097 command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
11099 *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
11100 file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
11101 session to resolve them.
11103 Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
11104 resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
11105 contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
11108 *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
11109 command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
11110 you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
11111 either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
11112 branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
11113 If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
11116 ** Changes in Font Lock
11118 *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
11119 are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
11120 use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
11121 unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
11122 compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
11124 ** Frame name display changes
11126 *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
11127 frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
11128 raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
11129 when many frames are invisible or iconified.
11131 *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
11132 frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
11135 ** Comint (subshell) changes
11137 *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
11138 subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
11139 with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
11141 *** There are new commands in Comint mode.
11143 C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
11144 that is, the line after the last line you got.
11145 You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
11147 C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
11148 send the current line together with the following line, when you send
11149 the following line.
11151 C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
11152 which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
11153 previously sent input.
11155 C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
11156 it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
11157 as the search string.
11159 *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
11160 automatically in compilation-mode windows.
11164 *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
11165 and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
11166 assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
11169 *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
11170 (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
11171 Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
11172 style is still the default however.
11174 *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
11176 *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
11177 are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
11178 them. They do not have key bindings by default.
11180 *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
11181 and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
11183 *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
11184 namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
11186 *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
11187 makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
11189 *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
11190 c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
11192 *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
11193 should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
11194 package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
11195 variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
11197 ** Changes to hippie-expand.
11199 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
11200 non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
11201 which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
11203 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
11204 non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
11205 expanding dynamically.
11207 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
11208 non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
11210 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
11211 non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
11212 this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
11213 expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
11215 *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
11217 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
11219 *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
11220 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
11221 automatic key generation. This replaces variable
11222 bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
11223 against the first word in the title.
11225 *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
11226 capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
11227 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
11228 lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
11229 lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
11230 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
11232 *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
11233 generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
11234 replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
11235 bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
11237 ** Changes in vcursor.el.
11239 *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
11240 and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
11241 variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
11242 entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
11243 `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
11244 in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
11246 *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
11247 Editing group once the package is loaded.
11249 *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
11250 generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
11251 vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behavior.
11253 *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
11254 vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
11258 *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
11259 buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
11260 are identified by syntax tables in effect.
11262 *** Generic region skipping implemented.
11263 A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
11264 and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
11265 defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
11268 o URLs are automatically skipped
11269 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
11271 *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
11273 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
11275 RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
11276 large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
11277 re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
11278 section `Optimizations' in the manual.
11280 *** New recursive parser.
11282 The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
11283 entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
11284 recursive parser scans the individual files.
11286 *** Parsing only part of a document.
11288 Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
11289 partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
11290 the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
11292 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
11294 *** Storing parsing information in a file.
11296 This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
11298 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
11300 *** Using multiple selection buffers
11302 If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
11303 for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
11305 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
11307 *** References to external documents.
11309 The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
11310 documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
11311 documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
11312 macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
11313 RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
11314 the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
11315 The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
11317 *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
11319 The built-in command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
11320 and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
11322 Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
11323 the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
11325 *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
11327 The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
11328 buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
11330 *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
11332 The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
11333 contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
11334 `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
11335 have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
11336 enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
11337 at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
11340 *** Support for the varioref package
11342 The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
11346 Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
11347 and citations are created. These hooks are
11348 `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
11349 `reftex-format-cite-function'.
11351 *** Citations outside LaTeX
11353 The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
11354 a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
11356 *** Short context is no longer fontified.
11358 The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
11359 fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
11362 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
11364 ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
11365 With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
11366 the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
11367 directories that contain the same file name.
11369 Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
11370 Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
11371 file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
11372 Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
11373 have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
11374 names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
11375 directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
11378 ** New modes and packages
11380 *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
11381 It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
11382 it, but some do not.
11384 *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
11387 *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
11388 current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
11389 around in a buffer.
11391 Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
11393 *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
11394 uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
11395 be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
11396 established system of notation similar to Chess.
11398 *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
11399 documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
11400 guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
11402 *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
11403 available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
11404 system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
11405 simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
11406 functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
11409 *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
11410 identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
11412 *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
11413 within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
11414 used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
11415 the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
11417 *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
11419 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
11420 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
11421 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
11422 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
11423 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
11424 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
11425 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
11426 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
11427 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
11428 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
11429 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
11431 Platform-specific modes:
11433 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
11434 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
11435 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
11436 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
11437 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
11438 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
11439 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
11440 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
11441 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
11443 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
11445 ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
11446 use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
11447 That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
11448 Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
11450 Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
11451 you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
11452 consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
11454 ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
11455 and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
11456 specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
11457 searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
11459 ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
11460 multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
11461 character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
11464 ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
11465 take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
11466 string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
11467 current input method for reading this one event.
11469 ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
11470 now control whether to output certain characters as
11471 backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
11472 non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
11473 characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
11474 in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
11476 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
11478 ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
11479 of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
11481 ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
11482 in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
11483 always increases point by 1.
11485 The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
11486 considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
11488 See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
11490 ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
11491 Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
11492 default value changed. For example,
11494 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
11499 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
11502 If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
11503 default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
11504 is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
11505 `:version' in the top level group.
11507 This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
11509 ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
11510 starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
11512 However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
11513 symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
11514 support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
11517 If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
11518 this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
11521 ** There is a new debugger command, R.
11522 It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
11523 in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
11525 ** Frame-local variables.
11527 You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
11528 the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
11529 local bindings for that variable.
11531 These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
11532 frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
11533 modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
11536 Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
11537 Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
11538 active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
11539 that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
11541 It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
11542 clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
11543 very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
11544 through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
11546 ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
11547 "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
11548 evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
11549 makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
11550 See the documentation in sregex.el.
11552 ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
11553 is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
11554 parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
11555 The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
11557 ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
11558 If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
11560 ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
11561 known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
11562 define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
11564 ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
11565 when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
11566 it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
11567 history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
11569 The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
11570 return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
11573 ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
11574 for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
11575 `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
11576 Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
11577 `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
11579 ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
11580 echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
11581 a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
11582 default password to use if the user enters nothing.
11584 ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
11585 specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
11586 function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
11587 place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
11588 non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
11590 ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
11591 If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
11592 up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
11593 end of the window, even if this requires computation.
11595 ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
11596 which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
11597 If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
11599 ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
11600 holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
11601 was directed to display this buffer.
11603 ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
11604 with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
11605 describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
11606 other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
11607 set-window-configuration.
11609 ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
11610 window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
11611 positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
11612 windows and the choice of buffers to display.
11614 ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
11615 override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
11616 look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
11618 If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
11619 non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
11620 map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
11622 minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
11623 and it is meant to be set by major modes.
11625 ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
11626 except that it discards all text properties from the result.
11628 ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
11629 USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
11630 floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
11632 ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
11633 to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
11634 in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
11635 it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
11639 *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
11640 keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
11643 The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
11644 a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
11645 you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
11646 can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
11647 then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
11649 *** A new format for menu items is supported.
11651 In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
11652 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
11653 defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
11654 starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
11657 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
11658 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
11659 where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
11660 string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
11661 The supported properties include
11663 :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
11665 :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
11666 item should appear in the menu.
11668 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
11669 which will be REAL-BINDING.
11670 It should return a binding to use instead.
11672 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
11673 binding for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
11674 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
11675 :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
11676 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
11679 This means that the command normally has no
11680 keyboard equivalent.
11681 :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
11682 :button (TYPE . SELECTED)
11683 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
11684 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
11685 value says whether this button is currently selected.
11687 Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
11688 Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
11690 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
11694 *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
11695 mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
11696 corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
11697 which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
11699 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
11701 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
11702 same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
11703 indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
11704 negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
11705 the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
11706 forward, away from the user.
11708 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
11710 *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
11711 files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
11712 and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
11713 filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
11714 loaded into Emacs. The format is:
11716 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
11718 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
11719 same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
11720 that were dragged and dropped.
11722 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
11724 ** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
11726 *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
11727 any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
11728 to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
11730 *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
11731 can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
11732 that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
11734 *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
11735 in Emacs 19 and before.
11737 The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
11738 The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
11740 *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
11741 buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
11742 unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
11743 representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
11745 This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
11746 as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
11747 viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
11748 one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
11749 will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
11751 This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
11752 representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
11753 (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
11754 consistent with the new representation.
11756 *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
11757 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
11758 about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
11759 however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
11761 The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
11762 nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
11763 using the table nonascii-translation-table.
11765 *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
11766 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
11767 representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
11769 The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
11770 loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
11771 is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
11773 *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
11774 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
11776 *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
11777 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
11779 *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
11780 portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
11781 so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
11782 You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
11784 *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
11785 it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
11787 *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
11788 convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
11789 buffer or string being searched.
11791 One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
11792 [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
11793 searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
11794 searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
11795 obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
11796 you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
11797 expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
11799 *** Structure of coding system changed.
11801 All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
11802 by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
11803 which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
11804 as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
11805 vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
11806 your own alias name of a coding system by the function
11807 define-coding-system-alias.
11809 The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
11810 the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
11811 access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
11812 pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
11813 character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
11814 safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
11815 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
11818 Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
11819 The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
11820 coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
11821 (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
11823 Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
11824 also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
11825 are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
11826 the other character sets and read it back correctly.
11828 *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
11829 proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
11830 This function requires a user interaction.
11832 *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
11833 find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
11834 select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
11835 systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
11836 a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
11837 select-safe-coding-system.
11839 *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
11840 decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
11841 last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
11844 *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
11845 used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
11846 coding systems used by some specific language environment.
11848 *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
11849 return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
11850 characters are found, they now return a list of single element
11851 `undecided' or its subsidiaries.
11853 *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
11854 coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
11855 coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
11858 *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
11859 coding system for communicating with other X clients.
11861 *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
11862 character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
11863 character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
11864 each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
11865 either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
11866 range of characters.
11868 *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
11869 Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
11871 *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
11872 in the current buffer at position POS.
11874 *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
11875 input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
11876 function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
11877 character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
11878 event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
11879 binding input-method-function to nil.
11881 The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
11882 method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
11883 input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
11884 the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
11885 not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
11887 The input method function is not called when reading the second and
11888 subsequent events of a key sequence.
11890 *** You can customize any language environment by using
11891 set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
11893 The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
11894 customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
11895 instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
11896 environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
11897 exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
11899 * Changes in Emacs 20.1
11901 ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
11902 options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
11903 at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
11906 M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
11907 user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
11909 With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
11910 session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
11911 in your .emacs file.)
11913 ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
11914 You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
11916 ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
11917 This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
11919 ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
11920 immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
11923 The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
11924 delete the character before point, as usual.
11926 ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
11927 on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
11928 by setting search-highlight to nil.)
11930 ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
11931 insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
11932 the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
11933 onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
11934 history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
11937 ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
11938 This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
11939 in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
11940 TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
11941 makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
11943 As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
11944 and is an alias for it.
11946 If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
11947 use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
11949 ** Scrolling changes
11951 *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
11952 position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
11954 In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
11955 on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
11958 *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
11959 move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
11960 screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
11961 does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
11963 *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
11964 top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
11965 comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
11966 recenters the window.
11968 ** International character set support (MULE)
11970 Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
11971 including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
11972 Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
11973 Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
11974 features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
11975 MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
11977 Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
11978 coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
11979 character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
11980 variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
11981 into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
11983 Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
11984 generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
11985 supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
11986 language, to make it possible to type them.
11988 The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
11989 character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
11991 The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
11992 to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
11994 You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
11996 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
11998 Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
11999 characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
12000 argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
12001 already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
12002 characters for their work until they want to change.
12006 An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
12007 specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
12008 has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
12009 the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
12010 support several input methods.
12012 The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
12013 another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
12016 A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
12017 characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
12018 composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
12019 consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
12020 sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
12023 The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
12024 by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
12025 First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
12026 marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
12027 mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
12029 None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
12030 they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
12031 phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
12032 converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
12034 Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
12035 word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
12036 typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
12037 the first guess is wrong.
12039 *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
12040 turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
12042 If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
12043 byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
12044 they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
12045 the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
12047 However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
12048 use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
12049 includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
12050 translate automatically to and from either one.
12052 *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
12054 Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
12055 file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
12056 sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
12059 If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
12060 example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
12061 system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
12062 multibyte characters in that buffer.
12064 If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
12065 character conversion as well.
12067 *** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
12069 A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
12070 Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
12071 requires using many fonts.
12073 Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
12074 collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
12076 A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
12077 the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
12078 have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
12079 you would use a font.
12081 If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
12082 specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
12083 display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
12085 The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
12086 (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
12089 *** Defining fontsets.
12091 Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
12092 chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
12093 with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
12095 Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
12096 of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
12097 `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
12098 standard fontset are created automatically.
12100 If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
12101 argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
12102 FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
12103 with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
12104 name is `fontset-startup'.
12106 Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
12107 The resource value should have this form:
12108 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
12109 FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
12110 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
12111 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
12112 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
12113 The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
12114 of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
12115 CHARSET-NAME should be the name of a character set, and FONT-NAME
12116 should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
12118 Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
12119 last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
12120 You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
12122 For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
12123 font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
12124 following resource,
12125 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
12126 the font for ASCII is generated as below:
12127 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
12128 Here is the substitution rule:
12129 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
12130 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
12131 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
12132 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
12133 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
12135 The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
12136 fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
12137 that function explicitly to create a fontset.
12139 With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
12140 like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
12141 name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
12142 fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
12145 *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
12146 defaults for a particular choice of language.
12148 Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
12149 method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
12150 visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
12151 already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
12152 language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
12153 system for new files that you create.
12155 It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
12156 set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
12157 whole Emacs session.
12159 For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
12160 chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
12161 with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
12163 *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
12164 specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
12165 specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
12166 the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
12167 coding systems that Emacs supports.
12169 *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
12170 lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
12171 This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
12172 After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
12173 is used for *the immediately following command*.
12175 So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
12176 write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
12178 If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
12179 then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
12181 For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
12182 visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
12184 *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
12185 construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
12186 to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
12187 specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
12190 *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
12191 the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
12192 code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
12193 translated into that character code.
12195 This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
12196 various countries to support the languages of those countries.
12198 By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
12200 *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
12201 the coding system for keyboard input.
12203 Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
12204 with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
12205 some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
12207 By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
12209 Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
12210 input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
12211 translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
12212 to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
12213 designed to work with terminals.
12215 *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
12216 specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
12217 This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
12218 has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
12219 translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
12220 in the corresponding buffer.
12222 By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
12224 *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
12225 to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
12226 It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
12228 *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
12229 an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
12230 command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
12233 C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
12234 method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
12236 *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
12237 layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
12238 remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
12239 which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
12241 *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
12242 the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
12243 related information.
12245 *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
12246 HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
12249 *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
12250 information about the support for a particular language.
12251 You specify the language as an argument.
12253 *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
12254 the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
12257 A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
12258 (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
12259 whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
12260 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
12262 A alternativnyj (Russian)
12264 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
12265 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
12266 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
12267 E euc-japan (Japanese)
12268 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
12269 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
12270 K euc-korea (Korean)
12273 S shift_jis (Japanese)
12276 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
12277 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
12278 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
12279 v viqr (Vietnamese)
12282 When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
12283 two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
12284 coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
12285 keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
12287 *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
12288 conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
12290 When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
12291 into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
12292 rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
12293 Rmail files themselves.
12295 *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
12296 conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
12298 Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
12301 - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
12302 - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
12303 - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
12304 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
12305 - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
12307 *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
12308 to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
12309 Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
12312 ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
12313 of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
12314 insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
12315 without any conversion.
12317 ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
12318 You can now specify any number of octal digits.
12319 RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
12320 any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
12322 ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
12323 functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
12325 Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
12326 Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
12328 Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
12329 mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
12331 ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
12332 complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
12333 in the buffer before point.
12335 With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
12336 symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
12339 With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
12340 just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
12342 ** File locking works with NFS now.
12344 The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
12345 in the same directory as FILENAME.
12347 This means that collision detection between two different machines now
12348 works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
12349 can become a bottleneck.
12351 The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
12352 does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
12353 create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
12354 file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
12355 rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
12356 so useful that the change is worth while.
12358 When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
12359 are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
12360 collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
12361 tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
12363 ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
12364 it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
12367 ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
12368 selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
12369 delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
12371 ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
12372 within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
12373 complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
12375 ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
12376 it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
12377 set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
12379 ** Changes in View mode.
12381 *** Several new commands are available in View mode.
12382 Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
12384 *** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
12385 view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
12387 *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
12390 *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
12391 scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
12393 *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
12394 non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
12395 not just the selected window.
12397 *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
12398 read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
12399 turns View mode on or off.
12401 *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
12402 how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
12403 delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
12405 ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
12406 now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
12408 ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
12409 has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
12410 presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
12411 which version to compare with.
12413 ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
12414 blocks if a match is inside the block.
12416 The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
12417 is outside the block. By customizing the variable
12418 isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
12419 shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
12421 By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
12422 of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
12423 blocks, all of them or none.
12425 ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
12426 current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
12427 confirmation first.
12429 ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
12430 now changes the major mode according to that file name.
12431 However, the mode will not be changed if
12432 (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
12433 (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
12434 not suitable for ordinary files, or
12435 (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
12437 This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
12439 However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
12440 these commands do not change the major mode.
12442 ** M-x occur changes.
12444 *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
12445 it performs a case-sensitive search.
12447 *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
12448 if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
12449 using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
12451 ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
12452 in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
12453 window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
12454 that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
12455 buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
12457 ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
12458 after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
12459 appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
12460 come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
12462 ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
12463 selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
12464 buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
12466 ** Outline mode changes.
12468 *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
12470 *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
12472 ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
12473 you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
12474 Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
12475 was already active.
12477 The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
12478 unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
12479 get confused by it.
12481 If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
12482 set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
12484 ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
12486 *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
12487 conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
12488 character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
12489 including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
12491 The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
12492 mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
12493 copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
12495 *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
12496 are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
12499 `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
12500 case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
12501 `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
12502 case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
12504 ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
12505 certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
12506 can be. The default value is 30.
12508 ** Changes in Mail mode.
12510 *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
12511 Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
12512 composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
12513 `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
12514 `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
12517 C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
12518 compose-mail-other-frame.
12520 *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
12521 the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
12522 replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
12523 buffer that shows the original message.
12525 *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
12526 with separator lines around the contents.
12528 *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
12529 in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
12530 definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
12531 need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
12533 *** New features in the mail-complete command.
12535 **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
12536 for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
12537 controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
12538 Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
12540 **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
12541 to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
12544 **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
12545 to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
12548 ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
12549 special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
12550 directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
12551 reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
12553 Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
12554 when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
12555 be taken to be magic.
12557 ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
12558 files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
12559 available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
12561 M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
12562 (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
12564 ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
12565 suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
12567 In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
12569 new key dired.el binding old key
12570 ------- ---------------- -------
12571 * c dired-change-marks c
12573 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
12574 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
12575 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
12577 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
12578 * ? dired-unmark-all-files C-M-?
12579 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
12580 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
12581 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
12582 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
12586 *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
12587 saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
12588 chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
12589 each time you run it.
12591 *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
12592 whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
12594 *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
12595 messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
12596 means to move in the opposite direction.
12598 *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
12599 you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
12601 *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
12602 just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
12603 It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
12604 can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
12609 *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
12611 *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
12614 *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
12615 `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
12617 *** Article washing status can be displayed in the
12620 *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
12622 *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
12624 (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
12626 *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
12627 are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
12628 `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
12630 *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
12632 *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
12634 *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
12635 See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
12637 *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
12638 Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
12639 used to pick articles.
12641 *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
12642 another have been added.
12644 `M-x gnus-change-server'
12646 *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
12647 generating lines in buffers.
12649 *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
12652 *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
12654 *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
12656 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
12658 *** Scores can be decayed.
12660 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
12662 *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
12663 Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
12665 *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
12668 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
12670 *** A new command for reading collections of documents
12671 (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `C-M-d'.
12673 *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
12675 *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
12676 even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
12678 *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
12679 (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
12681 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
12684 *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
12685 sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
12687 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
12689 *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
12691 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
12693 *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
12695 Use the `Y c' command.
12697 *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
12699 *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
12701 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
12703 *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
12704 from incoming mail before saving the mail.
12706 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
12708 *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
12710 *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
12711 the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
12713 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
12715 Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
12716 and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
12717 from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
12718 hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
12721 Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
12722 automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
12723 particular news group. This can be done by:
12725 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
12727 Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
12728 of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
12729 "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
12730 system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
12731 for reading and posting).
12733 CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
12734 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
12735 Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
12736 newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
12739 Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
12740 default. Here are some of these default settings:
12742 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
12743 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
12744 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
12745 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
12746 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
12748 When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
12749 the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
12751 ** CC mode changes.
12753 *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
12754 code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
12755 values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
12756 this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
12757 Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
12760 If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
12761 Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
12762 style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
12763 share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
12764 c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
12765 must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
12767 *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
12768 of the current buffer.
12770 *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
12771 it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
12772 of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
12774 *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
12775 style that the Python developers like.
12777 *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
12778 This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
12779 just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
12781 ** VC Changes [new]
12783 *** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
12784 name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
12785 directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
12787 This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
12788 master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
12791 You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
12792 RET in a buffer visiting that file.
12794 *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
12795 other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
12796 writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
12797 calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
12799 *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
12800 version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
12802 ** Calendar changes.
12804 *** A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or
12805 subclasses of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow
12806 you do this for the year of the selected date, or the
12807 following/previous years.
12809 *** There is now support for the Baha'i calendar system. Use `pb' in
12810 the *Calendar* buffer to display the current Baha'i date. The Baha'i
12811 calendar, or "Badi calendar" is a system of 19 months with 19 days
12812 each, and 4 intercalary days (5 during a Gregorian leap year). The
12813 calendar begins May 23, 1844, with each of the months named after a
12814 supposed attribute of God.
12816 ** ps-print changes
12818 There are some new user variables and subgroups for customizing the page
12821 *** Headers & Footers (subgroup)
12823 Some printer systems print a header page and force the first page to
12824 be printed on the back of the header page when using duplex. If your
12825 printer system has this behavior, set variable
12826 `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' to t.
12828 If variable `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' is non-nil, it prints a
12829 blank page as the very first printed page. So, it behaves as if the
12830 very first character of buffer (or region) were a form feed ^L (\014).
12832 The variable `ps-spool-config' specifies who is responsible for
12833 setting duplex mode and page size. Valid values are:
12835 lpr-switches duplex and page size are configured by `ps-lpr-switches'.
12836 Don't forget to set `ps-lpr-switches' to select duplex
12837 printing for your printer.
12839 setpagedevice duplex and page size are configured by ps-print using the
12840 setpagedevice PostScript operator.
12842 nil duplex and page size are configured by ps-print *not* using
12843 the setpagedevice PostScript operator.
12845 The variable `ps-spool-tumble' specifies how the page images on
12846 opposite sides of a sheet are oriented with respect to each other. If
12847 `ps-spool-tumble' is nil, ps-print produces output suitable for
12848 bindings on the left or right. If `ps-spool-tumble' is non-nil,
12849 ps-print produces output suitable for bindings at the top or bottom.
12850 This variable takes effect only if `ps-spool-duplex' is non-nil.
12851 The default value is nil.
12853 The variable `ps-header-frame-alist' specifies a header frame
12854 properties alist. Valid frame properties are:
12856 fore-color Specify the foreground frame color.
12857 Value should be a float number between 0.0 (black
12858 color) and 1.0 (white color), or a string which is a
12859 color name, or a list of 3 float numbers which
12860 correspond to the Red Green Blue color scale, each
12861 float number between 0.0 (dark color) and 1.0 (bright
12862 color). The default is 0 ("black").
12864 back-color Specify the background frame color (similar to fore-color).
12865 The default is 0.9 ("gray90").
12867 shadow-color Specify the shadow color (similar to fore-color).
12868 The default is 0 ("black").
12870 border-color Specify the border color (similar to fore-color).
12871 The default is 0 ("black").
12873 border-width Specify the border width.
12874 The default is 0.4.
12876 Any other property is ignored.
12878 Don't change this alist directly; instead use Custom, or the
12879 `ps-value', `ps-get', `ps-put' and `ps-del' functions (see there for
12882 Ps-print can also print footers. The footer variables are:
12883 `ps-print-footer', `ps-footer-offset', `ps-print-footer-frame',
12884 `ps-footer-font-family', `ps-footer-font-size', `ps-footer-line-pad',
12885 `ps-footer-lines', `ps-left-footer', `ps-right-footer' and
12886 `ps-footer-frame-alist'. These variables are similar to those
12887 controlling headers.
12889 *** Color management (subgroup)
12891 If `ps-print-color-p' is non-nil, the buffer's text will be printed in
12894 *** Face Management (subgroup)
12896 If you need to print without worrying about face background colors,
12897 set the variable `ps-use-face-background' which specifies if face
12898 background should be used. Valid values are:
12900 t always use face background color.
12901 nil never use face background color.
12902 (face...) list of faces whose background color will be used.
12904 *** N-up printing (subgroup)
12906 The variable `ps-n-up-printing' specifies the number of pages per
12909 The variable `ps-n-up-margin' specifies the margin in points (pt)
12910 between the sheet border and the n-up printing.
12912 If variable `ps-n-up-border-p' is non-nil, a border is drawn around
12915 The variable `ps-n-up-filling' specifies how the page matrix is filled
12916 on each sheet of paper. Following are the valid values for
12917 `ps-n-up-filling' with a filling example using a 3x4 page matrix:
12919 `left-top' 1 2 3 4 `left-bottom' 9 10 11 12
12923 `right-top' 4 3 2 1 `right-bottom' 12 11 10 9
12927 `top-left' 1 4 7 10 `bottom-left' 3 6 9 12
12931 `top-right' 10 7 4 1 `bottom-right' 12 9 6 3
12935 Any other value is treated as `left-top'.
12937 *** Zebra stripes (subgroup)
12939 The variable `ps-zebra-color' controls the zebra stripes grayscale or
12942 The variable `ps-zebra-stripe-follow' specifies how zebra stripes
12943 continue on next page. Visually, valid values are (the character `+'
12944 to the right of each column indicates that a line is printed):
12946 `nil' `follow' `full' `full-follow'
12947 Current Page -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
12948 1 XXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXX + 1 XXXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
12949 2 XXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXX + 2 XXXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
12950 3 XXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXX + 3 XXXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
12954 7 XXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXX + 7 XXXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
12955 8 XXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXX + 8 XXXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
12956 9 XXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXX + 9 XXXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
12959 -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
12960 Next Page -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
12961 12 XXXXX + 12 + 10 XXXXXX + 10 +
12962 13 XXXXX + 13 XXXXXXXX + 11 XXXXXX + 11 +
12963 14 XXXXX + 14 XXXXXXXX + 12 XXXXXX + 12 +
12964 15 + 15 XXXXXXXX + 13 + 13 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
12965 16 + 16 + 14 + 14 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
12966 17 + 17 + 15 + 15 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
12967 18 XXXXX + 18 + 16 XXXXXX + 16 +
12968 19 XXXXX + 19 XXXXXXXX + 17 XXXXXX + 17 +
12969 20 XXXXX + 20 XXXXXXXX + 18 XXXXXX + 18 +
12972 -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
12974 Any other value is treated as `nil'.
12977 *** Printer management (subgroup)
12979 The variable `ps-printer-name-option' determines the option used by
12980 some utilities to indicate the printer name; it's used only when
12981 `ps-printer-name' is a non-empty string. If you're using the lpr
12982 utility to print, for example, `ps-printer-name-option' should be set
12985 The variable `ps-manual-feed' indicates if the printer requires manual
12986 paper feeding. If it's nil, automatic feeding takes place. If it's
12987 non-nil, manual feeding takes place.
12989 The variable `ps-end-with-control-d' specifies whether C-d (\x04)
12990 should be inserted at end of the generated PostScript. Non-nil means
12993 *** Page settings (subgroup)
12995 If variable `ps-warn-paper-type' is nil, it's *not* treated as an
12996 error if the PostScript printer doesn't have a paper with the size
12997 indicated by `ps-paper-type'; the default paper size will be used
12998 instead. If `ps-warn-paper-type' is non-nil, an error is signaled if
12999 the PostScript printer doesn't support a paper with the size indicated
13000 by `ps-paper-type'. This is used when `ps-spool-config' is set to
13003 The variable `ps-print-upside-down' determines the orientation for
13004 printing pages: nil means `normal' printing, non-nil means
13005 `upside-down' printing (that is, the page is rotated by 180 degrees).
13007 The variable `ps-selected-pages' specifies which pages to print. If
13008 it's nil, all pages are printed. If it's a list, list elements may be
13009 integers specifying a single page to print, or cons cells (FROM . TO)
13010 specifying to print from page FROM to TO. Invalid list elements, that
13011 is integers smaller than one, or elements whose FROM is greater than
13012 its TO, are ignored.
13014 The variable `ps-even-or-odd-pages' specifies how to print even/odd
13015 pages. Valid values are:
13017 nil print all pages.
13019 `even-page' print only even pages.
13021 `odd-page' print only odd pages.
13023 `even-sheet' print only even sheets.
13024 That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like
13025 `even-page', but for values greater than 1, it'll
13026 print only the even sheet of paper.
13028 `odd-sheet' print only odd sheets.
13029 That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like
13030 `odd-page'; but for values greater than 1, it'll print
13031 only the odd sheet of paper.
13033 Any other value is treated as nil.
13035 If you set `ps-selected-pages' (see there for documentation), pages
13036 are filtered by `ps-selected-pages', and then by
13037 `ps-even-or-odd-pages'. For example, if we have:
13039 (setq ps-selected-pages '(1 4 (6 . 10) (12 . 16) 20))
13041 and we combine this with `ps-even-or-odd-pages' and
13042 `ps-n-up-printing', we get:
13044 `ps-n-up-printing' = 1:
13045 `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED
13046 nil 1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 20
13047 even-page 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20
13048 odd-page 1, 7, 9, 13, 15
13049 even-sheet 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20
13050 odd-sheet 1, 7, 9, 13, 15
13052 `ps-n-up-printing' = 2:
13053 `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED
13054 nil 1/4, 6/7, 8/9, 10/12, 13/14, 15/16, 20
13055 even-page 4/6, 8/10, 12/14, 16/20
13056 odd-page 1/7, 9/13, 15
13057 even-sheet 6/7, 10/12, 15/16
13058 odd-sheet 1/4, 8/9, 13/14, 20
13060 *** Miscellany (subgroup)
13062 The variable `ps-error-handler-message' specifies where error handler
13063 messages should be sent.
13065 It is also possible to add a user-defined PostScript prologue code in
13066 front of all generated prologue code by setting the variable
13067 `ps-user-defined-prologue'.
13069 The variable `ps-line-number-font' specifies the font for line numbers.
13071 The variable `ps-line-number-font-size' specifies the font size in
13072 points for line numbers.
13074 The variable `ps-line-number-color' specifies the color for line
13075 numbers. See `ps-zebra-color' for documentation.
13077 The variable `ps-line-number-step' specifies the interval in which
13078 line numbers are printed. For example, if `ps-line-number-step' is set
13079 to 2, the printing will look like:
13091 integer an integer specifying the interval in which line numbers are
13092 printed. If it's smaller than or equal to zero, 1
13095 `zebra' specifies that only the line number of the first line in a
13096 zebra stripe is to be printed.
13098 Any other value is treated as `zebra'.
13100 The variable `ps-line-number-start' specifies the starting point in
13101 the interval given by `ps-line-number-step'. For example, if
13102 `ps-line-number-step' is set to 3, and `ps-line-number-start' is set to
13103 3, the output will look like:
13117 The variable `ps-postscript-code-directory' specifies the directory
13118 where the PostScript prologue file used by ps-print is found.
13120 The variable `ps-line-spacing' determines the line spacing in points,
13121 for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to
13124 The variable `ps-paragraph-spacing' determines the paragraph spacing,
13125 in points, for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to
13128 The variable `ps-paragraph-regexp' specifies the paragraph delimiter.
13130 The variable `ps-begin-cut-regexp' and `ps-end-cut-regexp' specify the
13131 start and end of a region to cut out when printing.
13133 ** hideshow changes.
13135 *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
13138 *** Support for java-mode added.
13140 *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
13141 in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
13143 *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the comments at
13144 the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
13145 way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
13147 *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
13148 robust and a lot faster.
13150 *** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
13152 *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
13153 to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
13154 documentation for more details.
13156 ** Changes in Enriched mode.
13158 *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
13159 filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
13160 of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
13161 use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
13162 the next time unless the fill-column is different.
13164 *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
13165 distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
13166 as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
13167 as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
13173 The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
13174 font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
13175 faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
13176 group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
13177 your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
13178 consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
13180 You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
13182 *** Maximum decoration
13184 Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
13185 default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
13186 of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
13187 supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
13188 to get the old behavior.
13192 Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
13194 Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
13195 support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
13197 *** Configurable support
13199 Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
13200 additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
13201 c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
13202 java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
13203 list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
13204 of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
13205 convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
13207 Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
13208 way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
13209 it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
13211 *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
13213 You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
13214 highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
13217 For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
13219 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
13225 Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
13226 font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
13227 distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
13228 to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
13230 *** Changes to fast-lock support mode
13232 The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
13233 cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
13234 same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
13236 *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
13238 The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
13239 according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
13240 the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
13241 non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
13242 refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
13243 the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
13244 Lock mode behavior and the behavior of Font Lock mode.
13246 This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
13247 For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
13248 this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
13249 refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
13250 containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
13251 the command M-o M-o (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
13253 As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
13255 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
13256 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
13257 Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
13258 new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
13260 If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
13263 ** Ada mode changes.
13265 *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
13266 If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
13267 procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
13268 you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
13271 *** There are two new commands:
13272 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
13273 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
13275 The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
13276 `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
13277 `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
13279 *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
13280 is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
13281 Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
13283 *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
13284 formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
13285 places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
13286 space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
13288 ** Scheme mode changes.
13290 *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
13291 mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
13292 for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
13293 with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
13296 If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
13297 still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
13298 scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
13299 variables as buffer-local variables.
13301 *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
13302 Use M-x dsssl-mode.
13304 ** Changes to the emacsclient program
13306 *** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
13307 USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
13308 associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
13309 can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
13311 *** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
13312 it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
13315 *** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
13316 use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
13317 ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
13318 option takes precedence.
13320 ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
13321 constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
13322 (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
13324 ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
13325 which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
13328 ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
13329 following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
13331 ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
13332 and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
13335 ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
13336 if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
13337 these register values no longer become completely useless.
13338 If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
13339 asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
13340 it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
13342 ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
13343 example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
13344 be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
13345 you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
13347 You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
13348 variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
13349 file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
13350 revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
13351 only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
13353 ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
13354 since it applies only to the current frame.
13356 ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
13357 file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
13358 and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
13360 This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
13361 multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
13362 variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
13363 tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
13364 instead of just the file you are editing.
13368 RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
13369 and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
13370 different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
13371 multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
13372 turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
13375 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
13376 knows which kind of label is needed.
13378 C-c ) reftex-reference
13379 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
13380 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
13382 C-c [ reftex-citation
13383 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
13384 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
13386 C-c & reftex-view-crossref
13387 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
13390 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
13391 can quickly jump to every section.
13393 Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
13394 commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
13395 Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
13396 reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
13397 C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
13399 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
13401 *** Info documentation is now available.
13403 *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
13404 both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
13406 *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
13407 bibtex-user-optional-fields.
13409 *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
13410 (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
13412 *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
13413 entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
13414 appropriate functions.
13416 *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
13417 entries. They are bound by default to C-M-l and C-M-h.
13419 *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
13422 *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
13423 bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
13425 *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
13426 shall be delimited.
13428 *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
13429 bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
13430 bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
13432 *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
13433 field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
13434 prefixed with `ALT'.
13436 *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
13437 bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
13438 formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
13441 *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
13442 documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
13443 for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
13445 *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
13446 comma should be inserted at end of last field.
13448 *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
13449 alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
13450 signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
13452 *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
13454 *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
13456 *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
13457 from alien sources.
13459 *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
13460 to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
13463 *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
13466 *** Added support for imenu.
13468 *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
13469 of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
13470 `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
13471 `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
13473 *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
13474 from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
13476 ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
13478 ** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
13480 ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
13481 functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
13482 Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
13485 When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
13486 and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
13488 ** browse-url changes
13490 *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
13491 Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
13492 (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
13493 non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
13494 customization variables.
13496 *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
13498 *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
13499 lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
13500 (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
13502 ** Changes in Ediff
13504 *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
13505 pops up the Info file for this command.
13507 *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
13508 the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
13509 merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
13512 *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
13513 and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
13514 files in the same directory.
13516 *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
13517 The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
13518 related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
13520 ** Changes in Viper
13522 *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
13523 *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
13525 *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
13526 *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
13527 Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
13528 *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
13529 *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
13530 *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
13531 color when Viper is in insert state.
13532 *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
13533 Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
13534 viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
13538 *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
13539 default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
13540 Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
13541 variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
13542 not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
13544 *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
13546 *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
13547 constructs are tagged. Files are recognized by the extension .java.
13549 *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
13550 recognized by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
13551 In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
13553 *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
13554 C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
13555 recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
13556 methods and protocols.
13558 *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognized by the extension
13559 .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
13560 column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
13563 *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
13564 an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
13565 at least M times and as many as N times.
13567 ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
13568 in files has changed slightly.
13570 With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
13571 time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
13572 This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
13573 with old time-stamp-format values.
13575 In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
13576 (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
13577 This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
13580 In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
13581 natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
13582 fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
13583 (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
13584 time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
13585 specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
13587 Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
13588 case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
13589 truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
13591 The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
13592 being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
13593 future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
13594 recommended now will continue to work then.
13596 See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
13599 ** There are some additional major modes:
13601 dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
13602 m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
13603 meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
13605 ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
13606 copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
13609 ** New Lisp packages include:
13611 *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
13613 *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
13614 be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
13616 *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
13618 *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
13621 *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
13622 See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
13625 *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
13626 meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
13627 ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
13628 strings or comments.
13630 These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
13631 abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
13632 you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
13633 insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
13636 *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
13637 can visit them by short forms of their names.
13639 *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
13640 Emacs Lisp function at point.
13642 *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
13644 *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
13645 switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
13647 *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
13649 *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
13651 *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
13653 *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
13654 from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
13656 *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
13657 You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
13658 inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
13659 original place after inserting the copy.
13661 *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
13664 You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
13665 velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
13666 (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
13668 Enable mouse-drag with:
13669 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
13671 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
13673 *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
13674 mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
13676 *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
13677 It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
13681 The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
13682 Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
13683 platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
13684 TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
13685 ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
13686 prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
13687 instance) and vice versa.
13689 To use this package load it using
13690 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
13691 Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
13692 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
13693 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
13694 The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
13695 ways of customization in `.emacs'.
13697 *** Interface to ph.
13699 Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
13701 The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
13702 services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
13705 *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
13707 *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
13708 You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
13709 while the real cursor does not move.
13711 *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
13712 for visiting your favorite web sites.
13714 *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
13715 so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
13719 Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
13720 mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
13721 supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
13722 user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
13724 This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
13726 * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
13728 ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
13730 Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
13731 end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
13732 Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
13733 file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
13734 file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
13736 To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
13737 C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
13738 coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
13739 specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
13740 LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
13741 save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
13743 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
13745 ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
13746 Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
13747 vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
13748 Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
13750 ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
13751 to start with w32- instead of win32-.
13753 In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
13754 don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
13757 ** Basic Lisp changes
13759 *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
13760 evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
13762 *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
13763 be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
13766 The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
13768 *** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
13770 (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
13771 (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
13773 *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
13774 usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
13777 *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
13779 *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
13781 *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
13783 *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
13784 error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
13785 include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
13788 *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
13789 or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
13790 whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
13792 *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
13793 either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
13794 adding one of these suffixes.
13796 *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
13797 which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
13798 If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
13800 We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
13801 because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
13803 *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
13805 *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
13806 You must load the `cl' library to define it.
13808 *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
13809 conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
13811 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
13813 BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
13814 BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
13816 *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
13817 choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
13818 restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
13819 works using `save-current-buffer'.
13821 *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
13822 write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
13825 *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
13826 which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
13827 last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
13830 *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
13831 characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
13834 For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
13836 *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
13837 with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
13838 Then it returns that string.
13840 For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
13842 (with-output-to-string
13843 (princ "The buffer is ")
13844 (princ (buffer-name)))
13846 returns "The buffer is foo".
13848 ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
13851 These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
13852 buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
13853 characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
13855 *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
13856 a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
13858 Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
13859 character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
13860 Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
13861 position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
13862 characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
13863 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
13865 ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
13866 Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
13867 non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
13870 The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
13871 through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
13872 "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
13873 range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
13874 leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
13876 *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
13877 (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
13878 multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
13879 character, which may be more than one buffer position.
13881 This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
13882 always one buffer position, need to be changed.
13884 However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
13886 *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
13887 because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
13888 have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
13889 the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
13892 *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
13893 between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
13896 When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
13898 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
13899 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
13900 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
13901 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
13902 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
13904 *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
13906 *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
13907 `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
13908 more than the number of characters.
13910 You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
13911 it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
13912 \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
13913 is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
13914 follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
13915 newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
13917 *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
13918 and returns a string containing those characters.
13920 *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
13921 (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
13922 counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
13923 character, sref signals an error.
13925 *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
13926 in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
13927 string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
13929 *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
13930 in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
13931 region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
13933 *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
13934 the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
13935 to a vector of the characters in it.
13937 *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
13938 of a string. You call it as follows:
13940 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
13942 This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
13943 STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
13944 This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
13945 Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
13946 it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
13948 *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
13949 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
13951 *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
13952 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
13954 *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
13955 to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
13956 not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
13957 which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
13959 (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
13961 This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
13963 The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
13964 If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
13965 are not included in the resulting value.
13967 The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
13968 at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
13969 WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
13970 is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
13972 If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
13973 place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
13974 character extends across that column), then the padding character
13975 PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
13976 string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
13977 column START-COLUMN.
13979 *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
13980 the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
13981 necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
13982 difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
13983 changed text, before the change.
13985 *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
13986 sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
13987 one character set for each script, not for each language.
13989 **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
13991 **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
13993 **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
13994 set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
13996 **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
13997 name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
13998 which identify the character within that character set.
14000 **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
14001 byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
14002 opposite of split-char.
14004 **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
14005 of all the characters between BEG and END.
14007 **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
14008 of all the characters in a string.
14010 *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
14011 and specifying coding systems.
14013 **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
14014 system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
14015 of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
14016 (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
14017 and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
14018 as what to do about code conversion.)
14020 **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
14021 name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
14023 **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
14024 for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
14025 except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
14027 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
14028 which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
14029 to match against a file name.
14031 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
14032 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
14033 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
14034 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
14035 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
14036 specifies the coding system for encoding.
14038 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
14039 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
14041 **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
14042 the coding system to use for network sockets.
14044 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
14045 which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
14046 either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
14049 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
14050 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
14051 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
14052 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
14053 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
14054 specifies the coding system for encoding.
14056 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
14057 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
14059 **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
14060 for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
14061 except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
14062 start the subprocess.
14064 **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
14065 systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
14066 when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
14067 (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
14068 to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
14070 **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
14071 coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
14074 It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
14075 but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
14076 start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
14077 connection permanently or until overridden.
14079 The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
14080 file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
14081 network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
14082 coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
14083 It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
14084 system for one operation at a time.
14086 **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
14087 files, subprocesses or network connections.
14089 **** The function process-coding-system tells you what
14090 coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
14091 The value is a cons cell,
14092 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
14093 where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
14094 the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
14095 input to the subprocess.
14097 **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
14098 change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
14100 ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
14101 customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
14102 you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
14104 You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
14105 variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
14106 information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
14107 legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
14110 Thus, instead of writing
14112 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
14113 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
14115 you would now write this:
14117 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
14118 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
14122 The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
14123 two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
14124 describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
14125 for a description of them.
14127 The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
14128 should belong to. You define a new group like this:
14130 (defgroup ispell nil
14131 "Spell checking using Ispell."
14134 The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
14135 group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
14136 but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
14137 to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
14138 second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
14140 Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
14141 package should have just one group; a more complex package should
14142 have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
14143 package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
14144 first-level subgroups.
14146 ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
14148 This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
14149 separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
14153 The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
14154 developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
14155 only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
14156 predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
14157 `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
14158 `easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
14160 ** Text property changes
14162 *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
14165 *** The new functions next-char-property-change and
14166 previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
14167 place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
14168 functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
14169 starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
14171 If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
14172 LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
14173 of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
14174 position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
14176 *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
14177 value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
14178 is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
14180 ** Changes in invisibility features
14182 *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
14183 hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
14184 is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
14185 should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
14186 would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
14187 make the overlay visible.
14189 During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
14190 invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
14191 needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
14192 which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
14193 the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
14194 t when it should hide it.
14196 *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
14198 Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
14199 invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
14200 and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
14201 Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
14202 manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
14203 Here is an example of how to do this:
14205 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
14206 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
14207 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
14208 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
14211 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
14214 ;; When done with the overlays:
14215 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
14216 ;; Or respectively:
14217 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
14219 ** Changes in syntax parsing.
14221 *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
14222 `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
14223 obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
14224 `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
14226 If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
14227 is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
14228 used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
14230 When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
14231 character in the buffer is calculated thus:
14233 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
14234 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
14236 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
14237 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
14238 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
14240 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
14241 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
14242 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
14243 determine the syntax type of the character.
14245 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
14246 of the current buffer.
14248 *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
14249 value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
14250 for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
14252 *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
14253 and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
14254 only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
14255 character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
14256 another character with the same code (unless quoted).
14258 These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
14261 *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
14262 arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
14263 of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
14265 *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
14266 (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
14267 element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
14268 nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
14269 string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
14271 *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
14272 syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
14273 `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
14275 ** Changes in face features
14277 *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
14278 if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
14280 *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
14281 of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
14283 *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
14284 set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
14286 *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
14287 set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
14289 *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
14290 by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
14291 and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
14292 the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
14295 This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
14296 arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
14298 ** Changes in file-handling functions
14300 *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
14301 directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
14302 they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
14303 is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
14305 This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
14308 *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
14309 it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
14311 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
14312 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
14314 *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
14315 as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
14317 *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
14318 character code conversion as well as other things.
14320 Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
14321 (formerly it did not).
14323 *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
14324 environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
14326 *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
14327 instead of constant strings.
14329 *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
14330 to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
14331 any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
14333 substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
14334 in the same way as before.
14336 *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
14337 The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
14338 which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
14340 *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
14341 error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
14342 else, and returns nil.
14344 *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
14345 directory cannot be listed.
14347 ** Changes in minibuffer input
14349 *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
14350 read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
14351 additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
14352 argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
14355 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
14356 It is available through the history command M-n.
14358 *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
14359 read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
14360 argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
14361 minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
14362 enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
14364 In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
14365 argument in this way.
14367 *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
14368 from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
14369 minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
14371 ** Echo area features
14373 *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
14374 echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
14375 minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
14376 after the echo area is cleared.
14378 *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
14379 in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
14381 ** Keyboard input features
14383 *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
14384 set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
14386 *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
14387 received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
14388 by keyboard macros.
14390 ** Frame-related changes
14392 *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
14393 creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
14394 hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
14396 *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
14397 the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
14398 has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
14400 *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
14401 selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
14402 value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
14403 in the selected frame.
14405 *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
14406 is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
14407 which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
14409 ** X Windows features
14411 *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
14412 x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
14413 x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
14415 *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
14416 The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
14418 *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
14419 MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
14420 A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
14422 If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
14423 it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
14425 ** Subprocess features
14427 *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
14428 functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
14431 *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
14432 and returns the output from the command as a string.
14434 *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
14435 and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
14437 ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
14438 does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
14440 ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
14441 at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
14442 goes after the other menu items.
14444 ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
14445 of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
14446 around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
14449 The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
14450 series of several changes--if that seems safe.
14452 Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
14453 after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
14456 ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
14457 is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
14458 but its hook is still run.
14460 ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
14461 for errors that are handled by condition-case.
14463 If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
14464 regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
14465 useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
14467 This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
14468 are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
14469 filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
14472 ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
14473 way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
14475 ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
14476 integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
14477 functions like display-time.
14479 ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
14480 name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
14482 ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
14483 can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
14484 is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
14486 ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
14487 if there is an error in compilation.
14489 ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
14490 switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
14491 argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
14492 they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
14494 ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
14495 Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
14496 the *scratch* buffer.
14498 ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
14499 The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
14500 where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
14501 e.g., in Font Lock mode.
14503 ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
14504 and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
14505 It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
14507 ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
14508 using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
14509 variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
14510 and compose-mail-other-frame.
14512 ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
14513 can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
14514 full name of the specified user will be returned.
14516 ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
14517 of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
14518 where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
14519 in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
14520 option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
14523 ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
14524 and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
14525 width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
14526 the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
14528 For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
14529 minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
14530 with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
14531 is how %S normally pads to two positions.
14533 ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
14535 ** imenu.el changes.
14537 You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
14538 item from menu created by imenu.
14540 An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
14541 #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
14542 select one of those items.
14544 * For older news, see the file ONEWS
14546 ----------------------------------------------------------------------
14547 Copyright information:
14549 Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004,
14550 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
14552 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
14553 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
14554 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
14555 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
14557 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
14558 of this document, or of portions of it,
14559 under the above conditions, provided also that they
14560 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
14564 paragraph-separate: "[
\f]*$"
14567 arch-tag: 1aca9dfa-2ac4-4d14-bebf-0007cee12793